JP2019088635A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase player's eagerness for a game.SOLUTION: A main CPU 101 sets one of setting values from setting values of a plurality of stages having different probabilities of determining a winning in special symbol winning determination processing, and transmits setting value information to a sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 that has received the information executes a suggestion performance that suggests the setting value set by the main CPU 101. Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 can execute a suggestion performance suggesting the setting value while a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state are performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In pachinko gaming machines, one that has one type (for example, 1/30) with high probability and one type (for example, 1/300) with low probability is the mainstream in the probability of becoming a big hit. As described above, there have been provided six setting values, each having a jackpot probability different from one stage to another, and capable of setting one of the six setting values. With such a configuration, even with the same pachinko gaming machine, since it is possible to play a game under different jackpot probabilities, it is possible to realize a game that is full of change.

JP, 2012-085674, A

  However, since it is not suggested to the player who is playing the game what the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine is, there is room for improvement in further improvement of the gaming intention. there were.

  An object of the present invention is to improve the willingness to play in view of such circumstances.

  (1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the starting opening formed in the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down and the fact that the gaming ball has entered the starting opening. Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state, advantageous gaming state control means for controlling an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player in the gaming state which can be shifted after the end of the special gaming state, and in the determination Setting operation means for setting any one of setting values from setting values of a plurality of steps having different degrees of advantage; and suggestion effect execution means for performing suggestion effect suggesting the setting value set by the setting operation means The suggestion effect execution means may execute the suggestion effect in the advantageous game state. Thus, in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set, and by thus adding fun to guess the set value by executing the suggestive effect, it is possible to further improve the gaming intention. Can. In addition, it is possible to evoke a feeling of wanting to shift to the advantageous gaming state and check the suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the gaming intention.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), variation display of identification information is started based on the game ball entering the start opening, and the variation display is stopped with the lapse of variation time. Identification information display means for deriving the result of determination, a first fluctuation pattern in which a first fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation time, and a second fluctuation time whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time The system further comprises fluctuation pattern determination means for determining any fluctuation pattern from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the defined second fluctuation pattern, the first fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation pattern. The effect execution means is characterized in that the suggestion effect is not performed when the second variation pattern is determined. This can prevent the player from overlooking the execution of the suggested effect.

  (3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the suggestion effect is an effect of only suggesting a setting value set by the setting operation means. This allows the player to concentrate more on the game.

  (4) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the suggestion effect indicates the possibility that the special game state will be performed, in addition to the suggestion of the setting value set by the setting operation means. It is characterized by being an effect. This makes it possible to combine the possibility that the special game state will be performed and the set value. For example, if there is a high possibility that the special gaming state will be performed, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that a high setting value can be expected and a suggestion effect that one is likely to be low but the other is likely to be high. A variety of variations can be made, and further improvement of game entertainment can be achieved.

  According to the present invention, the gaming intention can be improved.

1 is an external front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is an appearance back view of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol hit determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a normal symbol hit decision table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a normal symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control board main process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main-control board | substrate timer interruption process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows input SW detection processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the special symbol variation start which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit game processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows production control board main processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows production control substrate timer interruption processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the special symbol variation pattern and the setting presence or absence execution presence / absence effect which concern on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation pattern table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the production | presentation pattern fluctuation | variation pattern which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and an execution notice. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the preliminary announcement production which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a setting suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion presentation related determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 6 is a flow chart showing each gaming state-specific processing (unchangeable middle 1/3) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flow chart showing each gaming state-specific processing (not changed 2/3) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flow chart showing each gaming state-specific processing (not changed 3/3) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the middle of no change (during change) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in non-shortening (during fluctuation stop) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in non-shortening (at the time of change start) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in non-shortening (demo screen transition) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion production in the non-shortening (presence button advance notice) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows each game state processing (one third of variation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing processing by gaming state (2/3 in variation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing processing by gaming state (3/3 in variation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the inside of the fluctuation (during fluctuation) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the variable middle (at the time of transition from a hit game) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing by each gaming state (one in a winning game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state processing (2/3 in a hit game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state processing (3/3 in a hit game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the middle of a hit game (when it shifts to a hit game within a predetermined period) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in a hit game (during a round game) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the middle of a hit game (during interval between rounds) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in a hit game (during an ending) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows execution of a setting suggestion effect in a hit game (mini game in a round game) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the existence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in the middle of a hit game (5000 generations unreached arrival) concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion production execution processing performed within the payment control board timer interruption processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the setting suggestion effect by control of the delivery control board concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol hitting determination table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit game processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the number of times of high probability state for each setting value, the number of times of variation state, and variation common short rendition according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows the number of times of the high probability state for every setting value concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention, the number of times of a variable state, and the relation of secrecy effect. It is an animation which shows a common rendition during the fluctuation according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the concealment effect concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is animation which shows the presence or absence of execution of a setting suggestion effect in ending at the time of a variable state end concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the existence of execution of a setting suggestion production in ending at the time of a secret production at the end of a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control board main process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the setting value information command reception in the main command reception process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each indicator in the presence or absence of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode (another example) of each indicator in the presence or absence of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention. In the following description, “front”, “rear”, “left”, “right”, “upper”, and “lower” refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 from the player side. It is pointing.

(External configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 for installation on a gaming machine installation island (not shown) of a game arcade, and the outer frame 2; , And a glass frame 4 axially supported by the middle frame 3 and facing the front side of the game board 6 and enabling visual recognition of the game board 6 through transparent glass, and the middle frame 3 , And is located below the glass frame 4 and has a receptacle member 5 capable of storing gaming balls. Glass frame 4 and saucer member 5 may be constituted by separation type, and may be constituted by integral type.

  In addition, the middle frame 3 is provided with a launcher (not shown) for launching the gaming ball to the gaming area 7 of the gaming board 6, and a launch handle 8 for causing the launcher to perform a launch operation. Is provided. The firing handle 8 can be held by the player and can be pivoted within a predetermined range, and the amount of pivoting can adjust the firing intensity when firing the gaming ball to the game area 7 It has become. For example, when it is rotated by the first amount of rotation (in the case of the first firing intensity), the gaming ball is fired to the left of the game area 7 (so-called "left strike" becomes possible), the first Game balls are fired on the right side of the game area 7 (in the case of the second firing strength), the game ball is fired to the right of the game area 7 Can be

  In addition, a light emitting device 9 (a lamp, an LED, etc.) is provided on the glass frame 4 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated by light emission. For example, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying that it is a win by emitting light in a rainbow color based on having been determined to be a win in the “special symbol hitting determination process” (see FIG. 12) described later. . Moreover, the speaker 10 is provided in the glass frame 4, and an audio | voice and an effect sound can be output. For example, when the below-mentioned "normal game state" is controlled, the music according to the "normal game state" can be output, and when the below-mentioned "probable change game state" is controlled, the "probability game" It is possible to output music according to the state.

  Also, the tray member 5 is composed of the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b, and the gaming ball is dispensed to the lower tray 5b when the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 5a exceeds a certain amount. It has become. In addition, the bowl member 5 has a ball removing button 11 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b at the end of the game, and a gaming ball lending device (not shown). The ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of the card, the card return button 13 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the gaming ball lending device, and the balance display unit 12a for displaying the balance of the valuable value medium Also, a ball lending permission lamp 12b is provided to notify that the ball lending is possible by the operation of the ball lending button 12.

  Further, the tray member 5 is provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15, which can be operated by the player when the operation promoting effect is executed. Further, the tray member 5 can be operated by the player, and the volume adjustment of the sound and the sound output outputted from the speaker 10, the adjustment of the light quantity emitted from the light emitting device 9, the image display device 26 described later A cross key button 16 is provided to adjust the amount of light emitted. The effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently of each other, or may be provided integrally.

  Here, as the operation promotion effect, for example, “pre-reach effect” performed before “reach” described later and “post-reach effect” performed after “reach” can be mentioned. As distribution of basic effects, the effect button 14 may be operable in both of “before reach” and “after reach”, and the effect lever 15 is operated in “after reach” It may be possible. In addition, distribution of presentation may be what kind of thing. For example, the production lever 15 may be operable as the “pre-reach production”. In addition, the effect button 14 may be provided with a vibration device, or the effect lever 15 may be provided with a vibration device. The vibrating device may vibrate, for example, when the decorative symbol described later is temporarily stopped and displayed as "777" or the like, or may be vibrated during the "before reach effect" or the "after reach effect" described above. Well, it may be easy to vibrate when it is determined to be a hit in the “special symbol hitting determination process”. Further, the effect button 14 may be capable of continuously pressing so-called "continuous hitting effect", or may be capable of so-called "long press effect" which continues to be pressed for a predetermined time.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIG. On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main control board 100, a presentation control board 200, a payout control board 300 and a payout device 304, and a power board 400 described later are provided (correctly These various control boards are attached to the back of the middle frame 3). Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting change device 31 described later is provided. The setting change device 31 includes a setting change key hole 31a for inserting a setting change key (not shown) managed by a store clerk in the game arcade, and a setting change button 31b for sequentially switching a plurality of setting values described later. A setting confirmation button 31 c for fixing the setting value to be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting display unit 31 d for displaying the setting value currently set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. When the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key hole 31a and rotated 90 degrees, the set value can be changed. In that state, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. When changing the setting value from there, the setting display unit 31b is pressed. 31. When the set value displayed on 31d is switched and displayed and the set value to be set is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting confirmation button 31c is pressed and the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees from the position When it is rotated to the original position and pulled out, the setting value to be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without inserting the setting change key into the setting change key hole 31a, or in a state where the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key hole 31a (not rotated 90 degrees) When it is turned on, the setting value can not be changed. In this case, the setting value currently set (setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is taken over.

  In addition, the change method of a setting value is not restricted to such a method, You may use another method. For example, without providing the setting confirmation button 31c, the setting change key may be fixed by rotating the setting change key from the position rotated 90 degrees to the original position and pulling it out. The setting value may be set according to the rotation position as it can be rotated in multiple steps. For example, when turning 45 degrees, the setting value is "1", when turning 90 degrees, the setting is "2", and when turning 135 degrees, the setting is "3". (In this case, the setting change key is always inserted). Further, the place where the setting change device 31 is provided may be provided anywhere as long as it is the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. For example, the main control board 100 may be provided. Further, the setting value may be displayed on another display unit without providing the setting display unit 31d. For example, setting values may be displayed on the “first special symbol display 27 a” or the “second special symbol display 27 b” of the symbol display device 27 described later. Further, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 26. With this configuration, the number of parts can be reduced.

  Further, changing the setting value includes changing the current setting value to a different setting value as well as setting the same setting value from the current setting value. For example, in the former case, when the current setting value is “1”, changing to any one of the setting value “2” to the setting value “4” is equivalent, and in the latter, the current setting value is “1” In the case of, it corresponds to changing to the setting value "1".

(Configuration of game board 6)
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 6 is formed of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material, and the image display device 26 is detachably attached to the back surface side. Further, on the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which game balls can be rolled, and an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail for guiding the game ball launched from the launch device to the game area 7. A member 19 is formed. Further, in the game area 7, there are a gate member 20 through which game balls can pass, a first start opening 21 into which the game balls can enter, and a stage 17 for facilitating entry into the first start opening 21. It is determined to be a hit in the second start opening 22 where the game ball can enter, the normal winning opening 23 where the game ball can enter, and the “special symbol hit determination process”, and the hit game is executed. In the case, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 24, the out-port 25 for discharging the game ball out of the game area (game ball discharge box), the movable body 28 movable in the vertical direction, and others, No play nails, windmills, etc. are provided. In addition, a game that is determined to be a hit in the “special symbol hit determination process” and the large winning opening 24 is opened a predetermined number of times is referred to as a “hit game”.

(About the gate member 20)
The gate member 20 is provided at the right central portion of the game area 7, and the game ball can pass when the so-called "right strike" in which the game ball is fired on the right side of the game area 7 It has become. In addition, it is always open upward, and always allows passage of the game ball. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the "pass gate detection process" described later is performed, and it is determined whether or not the below described projecting member (not shown) provided in the second starting opening 22 is projected. A “normal symbol variation game” is executed which performs “normal symbol hit determination processing” and derives the determination result of “normal symbol hit determination processing” after the normal symbol variation time described later has elapsed. It should be noted that if the game ball passes through the gate member 20 while the “normal symbol change game” based on the passage to the gate member 20 is being performed, the execution of the “normal symbol change game” based on the passage is suspended It is possible to hold up to "4" pieces, except for the "normal symbol variation game" being executed. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a reserve storage area for the "normal symbol variation game" is provided, and the reserve storage region is "the storage region" corresponding to the "normal symbol variation game" currently varying. And the "first storage area" corresponding to the "normal symbol variation game" to be played after the "normal symbol variation game" currently changing is over, and the "second storage region" and the "third storage" thereafter It is composed of “area” and “fourth storage area”, and when the “normal symbol variation game” that is currently changing is finished changing, it is stored in “first storage area” in “the relevant storage area”. The determination information (random number value) is transferred, and the determination information (random number value) stored in the “second storage area” is transferred to the “first storage area”, and the “second storage area” is transferred to the “third storage area”. The determination information (random number value) stored in the “storage area” is transferred, and The 憶領 range "," fourth determination information stored in the storage area "(random value) is transferred," fourth storage area "becomes empty. In addition, although "a normal symbol hit determination process" is not mentioned in the below-mentioned flow chart, it is processing performed in "a normal symbol related processing" of step S104 of FIG. 9, and the below-mentioned FIG. With reference to the symbol hit determination table, it is determined whether the normal symbol is "hit" or "loss". Moreover, although the gate member 20 used the member which a game ball can pass, it is good also as a gate member 20 which can enter a game ball using a ball entrance.

(About the first start port 21)
The first start opening 21 is provided at the central portion of the game area 7, and when the game ball is fired on the left side of the game area 7, so-called "left strike" is being performed, the game ball enters the ball. It is possible. In addition, it is always open upward, and always allows entry of gaming balls. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21, for example, the game ball of "3" ball is paid out as a winning ball, and besides the winning ball, "per special symbol hitting determination processing" is performed, and the special The symbol and decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image are variably displayed, and after the variation time described later elapses, the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol) of the “special symbol hitting determination process” is derived (decided display) “symbol The fluctuation game is executed. In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 while the “symbol changing game” based on entering the first starting opening 21 is being played, the “symbol changing game” based on the current entering The execution of the game is suspended, and it is possible to suspend up to "4" pieces except for the "symbol variation game" being executed. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserve storage area for the "symbol variation game" corresponding to the first starting opening 21. The reserve storage area corresponds to the "symbol variation game" currently varying. And the "first storage area" corresponding to the "symbol variation game" to be played after the "symbol variation game" which is currently fluctuating, and the "second storage area" thereafter. When the "symbol change game" which is made up of the "third storage area" and the "fourth storage area" and is currently changing is finished changing, the "first storage area" is displayed in the "corresponding storage area". The determination information (random number value) stored in is transferred, and the determination information (random number value) stored in the “second storage area” is transferred to the “first storage area”, and the “second storage area” is transferred to the “second storage area”. The determination information (random number value) stored in the “third storage area” is transferred, The third storage region "," fourth determination information stored in the storage area "(random value) is transferred," fourth storage area "becomes empty.

(About the second start opening 22)
The second start opening 22 is provided at the lower right of the game area 7, and when the game ball is fired on the right side of the game area 7, the game ball is inserted when so-called "right strike" is performed. It is possible for the ball. Further, unlike the first start opening 21, the second start opening 22 does not always open upward, and in principle, does not allow the game ball to enter (it is in a "closed" state). That is, the second starting opening 22 has a protruding member (not shown) which can be protruded to the front side, and the game is performed only when the protruding member protrudes to the front side (when it is in the "open" state) It becomes possible to enter the ball. In addition, whether or not the projecting member is protruded to the front side to allow the ball to enter the gaming ball is determined to be a hit in the above-mentioned “normal symbol hitting determination processing”, as described in FIG. It is possible to open and close in the opening and closing mode shown in the "opening and closing mode of the second start port". Then, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 22, for example, the game ball of "2" ball is paid out as a winning ball, and the above-mentioned "symbol variation game" is executed in addition to the winning ball. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 22 while the "symbol changing game" based on entering the second starting opening 22 is being played, the "symbol changing game" based on the entering the ball. The execution of the game is suspended, and it is possible to suspend up to "4" pieces except for the "symbol variation game" being executed. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserve storage area for the "symbol variation game" corresponding to the second starting opening 22, and the suspension storage area corresponds to the "symbol variation game" currently varying. And the "first storage area" corresponding to the "symbol variation game" to be played after the "symbol variation game" which is currently fluctuating, and the "second storage area" thereafter. It is made up of the "third storage area" and the "fourth storage area", and when the "symbol variation game" that is currently changing is finished changing, it is added to the "first storage area" in the "corresponding storage area". The stored determination information (random number value) is transferred, and the determination information (random number value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "second storage area" is transferred to the "second storage area". The determination information (random number value) stored in the third storage area is moved to The storage region "," fourth determination information stored in the storage area "(random value) is transferred," fourth storage area "becomes empty. In addition, in this embodiment, although the protrusion member movable to the front-back direction was used as the 2nd starting opening 22, you may use what is called "electric tulip" which has a movable wing piece.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 and the second starting opening 22 and performs the “special symbol hitting determination process”, and the special symbol and the decorative symbol image and the fourth symbol image "Various symbols are displayed as a series of flows such as displaying variable results and determining the determination processing (special symbol and decorative symbol image and fourth symbol image) of" special symbol hitting determination processing "after the variation time has elapsed It may be referred to as a game, or simply as a "one variation game".

  When the game ball of "1" enters the first starting opening 21, the game ball of "1" enters the "first special symbol display 27a" and the "image display device 26". When the "symbol variation game" based on the ball is executed and the game ball of "1" enters the second starting opening 22, the "second special symbol display 27b" and the "image display device 26" In, the "symbol variation game" is executed based on the fact that the "1" gaming ball has entered. Therefore, "symbol variation game" is a generic term for games played with "first special symbol display 27a" and "image display device 26", and "second special symbol display 27b", " The term "image display device 26" refers to a generic name of a game played.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, it is possible to derive the determination result (special symbol and decorative symbol image and fourth symbol image) of the “special symbol hitting determination process” after the variation time in the “symbol variation game” has passed ( Special symbol and decorative symbol image and fourth symbol image)). On the other hand, in the "symbol variation game", temporarily stopping the decorative symbol image before the variation time passes is referred to as "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. As an example of the "temporary stop display", the "swing fluctuation display" before the "final display" or the "reach" described later can be mentioned. With "swing fluctuation display" before "fixed display", the decoration symbol image "temporarily displays" with "767" etc., for example, or "finalized display" with "767" or "767" once It is the fluctuation display performed at the branch part of whether “77” is “confirmed” or “777” is displayed after “provisional stop display” is performed and the reverse effect is performed and “777” is displayed. .

(About normal winning opening 23)
The normal winning opening 23 is provided with a total of four “3” in the lower left of the game area 7 and “1” in the lower right, and the “3” normal winning openings 23 in the lower left are provided. When the so-called "left-handed" is being performed, the gaming ball can enter the ball, and the "1" normal winning opening 23 in the lower right is so-called "right-handed" In addition, the game ball can enter the ball. Further, the normal winning opening 23 is always open upward as in the case of the first starting opening 21 and always allows entry of gaming balls. Then, when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 23, for example, the game ball of the "8" ball is paid out as a winning ball. The arrangement position of the normal winning opening 23 can be arbitrarily changed, and the number may also be smaller than "4".

(About the big winning opening 24)
The special winning opening 24 is provided below the first starting opening 21. When the so-called "right-handed" is being performed, the gaming ball can enter the ball. The special winning opening 24 has an open / close door, and when it is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hit determination process", a hit game is executed, the open / close door tilts to the front, and the game ball Allow the ball to enter. Then, when the game ball enters the big winning opening 24, for example, the game ball of "10" ball is paid out as a winning ball. Here, in the hit game, the open / close door of the special winning opening 24 is opened (tilt to the front) over the number of award rounds shown in FIG. Then, when it is opened (tilted forward) over 29.5 S per round, and 10 balls of game balls are detected by the later-described large winning opening detection SW 24 a before 29.5 S elapses, the 29.5 S elapses Even before, close the door and proceed to the next round and repeat this for the prescribed number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5S has elapsed (so-called, "Attacker full open") before entering the game ball of 10 balls is detected by the big winning opening detection SW 24a, close the open / close door and advance to the next round become. In this case, one round game is ended without reaching 10 balls which is the specified ball entry number per round, which is disadvantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, an open / close door that tilts to the front side is used as the big winning opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may be used, or a "shutter member" that advances and retracts in the front and back direction may be used. Good. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is set as the panel surface structure which arrange | positions "one" of big winning opening 24, you may be a panel surface structure which arranges "2" pieces.

(About the image display device 26)
The image display device 26 is provided to be located above the stage 17 and can display the above-mentioned "symbol variation game" and effect images. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22 and the "special symbol hitting determination processing" is performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, The right decorative symbol image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variation display area. In addition, even when the game ball enters the first start opening 21 or when the game ball enters the second start opening 22 in common, the left decoration symbol image 26a, the middle decoration symbol image 26b, the right decoration The symbol image 26c is varied (vertically scrolled) in the variation display area (the special symbol display differs, but the decorative symbol image used in the image display device 26 is common). Then, the effect image is displayed within the fluctuation time described later, and when the fluctuation time elapses, if it is a win, for example, “7” is stopped in each decoration symbol image, and the combination of the decoration symbols of “777” is The final display is notified that the game is a win. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, for example, a combination of the decorative symbols of "765" is displayed in a definite manner to notify that the loss has occurred. In addition to the respective decorative symbol images, the fourth symbol image 26d (the fourth symbol following the above-described left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, and right decorative symbol image 26c) is displayed on the right of the display area It is possible to display at the lower side, and it is possible to perform variable display and finalized display in synchronization with each decorative symbol image. In addition, the image display device 26 displays a first start opening reserve number image 26 e that displays the number of suspension of “symbol variation game” in the first start opening 21 as “0” to “4” and the second start opening 22. The second starting opening reserved number image 26f displaying the number of suspension of "symbol variation game" with "0" to "4", and the number of suspension of "symbol variation game" in the first starting aperture 21 by a holding sphere image 1st starting opening 1st holding ball image display area 26g which displays 1st starting opening 2nd holding ball image display area 26h, 1st starting opening 3rd holding ball image display area 26i, 1st starting opening 4th holding ball image The second start opening first hold ball image display area 26k displaying the 26 display area j and the number of reservations of the "symbol variation game" in the second start opening 22 in the hold ball image, the second start opening second hold ball image Display area 26 l, second starting opening third holding ball image display area 26 m A fourth hold sphere image display region 26n second start hole, thereby enabling displayed. Here, the number of reservations displayed in the first starting opening storage number image 26e and the number of holdings displayed in the first starting opening first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26j The number is always synchronized, and the number of reservations displayed in the second starting opening reserved number image 26f and the second starting opening first holding ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26n Be sure to synchronize with the number of holds displayed. For example, when displaying "4" in the first starting opening reserved number image 26e, "4" is displayed in the first starting opening first storing ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26j. The holding ball image of will be displayed.

  Here, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d can display symbol images of “1” to “8”, and “special symbols” If the judgment result of the collision judgment process is a collision, the symbol of "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777" or "888" The combination of can be displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the “special symbol hitting determination process” is a loss, it is possible to display combinations of symbols other than the combinations of the symbols described above. In the case of a loss, in the special symbol variation pattern described later, when a special symbol variation pattern with "reach" is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "767" is finalized and a special symbol without "reach" When the symbol variation pattern is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "765" is displayed. In addition, "reach" is a state in which the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c display the same number image (provisional stop display) and the middle decorative symbol image 26b is variably displayed. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the "special symbol hitting determination process" is a hit, since it is always configured to go through "reach", the player can expect to have a hit You can say that. It should be noted that the fourth symbol image 26d may simply display a single digit number instead of the combination of the above-mentioned symbols, or may only display a two digit number, and the difference of the luminescent color It may be possible to identify the type of the symbol or the loss.

(About the symbol display device 27)
The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the gaming area (outside of the outer rail member 18) which is an area different from the gaming area 7 of the gaming board 6. As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a “symbol variation game” based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. A special symbol display 27a and a second special symbol display 27b for executing a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 22 are provided. Here, the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are configured by the "7" segment display, and in the "symbol variation game", the special symbol is changed from "- "(Horizontal bar symbol) is blinked, and when it is the timing to derive the judgment result of" special symbol hitting judgment processing ", if it is a loss,"-"(horizontal bar symbol) is lighted (fixed display) and If there is, for example, "7" is displayed (fixed display). That is, “special symbol” refers to a symbol whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol", the above-mentioned left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d are simply referred to as "symbols" or "identification". Information is sometimes called.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100 and is suspended for the “symbol variation game” based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. A first special symbol hold display 27c for displaying the number, and a second special symbol hold display 27d for displaying the number of holds of the "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 22 , Is provided. Here, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d are respectively configured by "2" dot LED indicators, and "off", "light", "flashing" It is possible to display the number of reservations by "". For example, when the number of reservations is "0", all dot LED indicators are "turned off", and when the number of reservations is "1", one is "lit" and the other is "turned off". If the number of reservations is "2", they both "light up", and if the number of reservations is "3", one of them lights up and the other "flashes", and the number of reservations is In the case of "4", they both "blink". In addition, the first special symbol hold display 27c, the number of hold displayed as the above-mentioned first starting opening holding number image 26e, and the first starting opening holding ball image display area 26g ~ first starting opening holding ball image display The second special symbol hold indicator 27d always synchronizes with the number of hold displayed in the area 26j, and the number of hold indicated as the second start opening hold number image 26f described above, and the second start opening hold ball It is always synchronized with the number of reservations displayed as the image display area 26k to the second starting opening holding ball image display area 26n. For example, when the first special symbol hold display 27c both "flashes" (when the number of hold is "4"), "4" is displayed as the first starting opening hold number image 26e, and the first start is displayed. In the mouth holding ball image display area 26 g to the first starting mouth holding ball image display area 26 j, “4” holding ball images are displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100, and a normal symbol that executes an “ordinary symbol variation game” based on passage of the game ball to the gate member 20. A display 27e is provided. Here, the normal symbol display 27e is configured by "2" dot LED indicators, and in the "normal symbol variation game", an aspect in which one is lit and the other is extinguished from the start of variation. If it is time to derive the judgment result of "normal symbol hitting judgment processing" by repeatedly executing the mode of turning off the other and turning on the other, if there is a loss, one will be turned on and the other will be turned off. If it is a win, one of them is turned off and the other is turned on.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100, and the number of “normal symbol variation games” is suspended based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. A normal symbol hold display 27f to be displayed is provided. In addition, the normal symbol hold indicator 27f is configured of "2" dot LED indicators in the same manner as the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d described above. Since the display aspect of the number of is also the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is controlled by the main control board 100, and indicates the number of times the big winning opening 24 is opened in the above-mentioned hit game. A round indicator 27g is provided to display "see number". Here, the round indicator 27g is composed of "2" dot LED indicators, one of which lights up when "five rounds of winning games" are being executed, and the other is of "ten rounds". Lights up when a hit game is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since "the game of 5 rounds of a game" and "the game of 10 rounds of a game" are provided, although it is comprised by "2" dot LED display, Depending on the number of games, the number of dot LED indicators can also be changed. For example, in the case of providing "3" types of hit games as a hit game, it can be configured by "3" dot LED indicators.

(Internal configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 has the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, the payout control board 300, and the power supply board 400 mounted on the rear side of the middle frame 3 (see FIG. 2). Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 only communicate in one direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 via a harness or the like (not shown). Are connected to make it possible. Further, the main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication. Further, the power supply substrate 400 receives supply of external power via a power plug (not shown), and the supplied external power is supplied to any of the main control substrate 100, the effect control substrate 200, and the payout control substrate 300. It is also connected to be able to supply.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. so that input from various SWs can be performed, and display control for various displays, And it is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. so that drive control to various solenoids becomes possible. In addition, the effect control board 200 is connected via a harness, a relay board or the like so that input from various SWs can be performed, and a harness or a display can be controlled so that various displays can be controlled. It is connected via a relay board or the like.

(About main control board 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, in the main control board 100, a main CPU 101 for performing control processing, a main ROM 102 for storing control programs necessary for the control processing, and a main capable of reading and writing necessary for the control processing. A RAM 103 is provided. Although not shown, in addition to these, an interrupt controller circuit for giving an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hard random number generation circuit for generating random numbers within a certain range, and the like are provided. The control processing in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

(About effect control board 200)
As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 has a sub CPU 201 that performs effect control processing, a sub ROM 202 that stores control programs necessary for the effect control processing, and reading and writing required for the effect control processing. A possible sub RAM 203 is provided. Further, an RTC (Real Time Clock) device 204 for outputting date information and time information to the effect control board 200 is provided. Further, although not shown, in addition to these, an interrupt controller circuit that applies an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 201, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like are provided. Further, as the above-mentioned effect control, display control of the image display device 26, audio output control of the speaker 10, light emission control of the light emitting device 9 and the illumination device 29 described later, and a drive device 30 described later Drive control of the movable body 28 and includes VDP (Video Display Processor) for controlling display of the image display device 26, image ROM and VRAM, sound source IC for controlling voice output of the speaker 10, voice ROM and voice RAM, and light emission. A lamp CPU, a lamp ROM, a lamp RAM, and the like which are responsible for controlling the light emission of the device 9 and the panel illumination device 29 are provided. The control processing in sub CPU 201 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

(About the dispensing control board 300)
As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 has a payout CPU 301 for performing payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 for storing a control program necessary for the payout control processing, and reading and writing required for the payout control processing. A possible payout RAM 303 is provided. Further, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the payout device 304, gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 5a. More specifically, for example, when information is detected on the game ball detected by the first start opening detection SW 21a described later on the main control board 100, the main control is performed so as to pay out the "3" ball. A dispensing command signal is transmitted from the substrate 100 to the dispensing control substrate 300, and the dispensing control substrate 300 that has received the signal controls the dispensing device 304 to dispense the winning balls of the "3" ball onto the upper tray 5a. . Then, when the payout of the "3" ball is completed, a payout completion signal is transmitted from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, and the information that the game ball is detected from the first starting opening detection SW 21a is input. Complete the payout of the game ball for what you did.

  Further, the discharge control board 300 is connected to the discharge handle 8 via a harness or the like, and that the player holds the discharge handle 8 and the amount of rotation of the discharge handle 8 described above is input. It is supposed to be. In addition, a launcher 305 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launcher 305, a game ball is launched to the game area 7. More specifically, the payout control board 300 responds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 when the player holds the launch handle 8 or inputs the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 from the launch handle 8. The launch device 305 is controlled with the launch intensity to launch the game ball. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected to be able to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. 1 via a ball lending unit etc. When the lend button 12 is operated by the player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to count the number corresponding to the “1” operation of the ball lend button 12 (for example, “125” ball). The game ball of) is paid out to the upper saucer 5a.

(About power supply board 400)
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via a harness or the like, and as described above, a power plug (not shown) The external power supplied is supplied to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply substrate 400 is provided with a conversion circuit or the like for converting external power (AC 100 volts) into DC 24 volts.

(About the frame open detection SW 3a)
The frame opening detection SW 3 a is provided on each of the outer frame 2 and the middle frame 3 and is a switch for detecting the open / close state of the middle frame 3. That is, the frame open detection switch 3a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and are closed when the middle frame 3 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 (closed state). Information in the state is to be input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 which has input the information in the closed state can detect that the middle frame 3 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. On the other hand, when the middle frame 3 is not accommodated in the outer frame 2 (open state), the information in the closed state described above is not input to the main control board 100 and is not input. 100 can detect that the middle frame 3 is not accommodated with respect to the outer frame 2. As described above, by detecting the open / close state of the middle frame 3 using the frame opening detection switch 3a, for example, it is possible to detect a wrongdoing of the setting change device 31.

(About gate detection SW 20a)
The gate detection SW 20 a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6 and is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20. That is, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board or the like, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Become. Then, the main control board 100 to which the detected information is inputted does not execute the "normal symbol variation game" in the normal symbol suspension display 27f, and the number of suspension of the "normal symbol variation game" is "0". If so, immediately control to execute the "normal symbol variation game", and if the number of reservations of the "normal symbol variation game" is "1" to "3," the "normal symbol variation game" Control to hold the execution of the "normal symbol variation game" is "4", it is controlled not to hold the execution of the "normal symbol variation game".

(About the first start opening detection SW 21a)
The first starting opening detection switch 21 a is provided inside the winning opening of the first starting opening 21 of the gaming board 6 and is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 21. That is, the first starting opening detection SW 21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when the ball entry of the game ball is detected. It will be done. Then, the main control board 100 which has input the detected information is for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the gaming ball of the “3” ball as a winning ball by the game ball having entered the first starting opening 21. Do the processing. Also, the main control board 100 does not execute the "symbol variation game" in any of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, and the first special symbol hold display 27c, If the number of reservations of the second special symbol suspension display 27d is "0", the first special symbol display 27a is immediately controlled to execute the "symbol variation game", and the first special symbol suspension display is performed. If the number of reservations of "symbol variation game" in the bowl 27c is "1" to "3", control is performed to suspend execution of the "symbol variation game", and "in the first special symbol suspension display 27c" When the number of suspension of the symbol variation game is “4”, control is performed so as not to suspend execution of the “symbol variation game”. Moreover, the main control board 100 is the "symbol variation game" in the first special symbol suspension indicator 27c except in the case where the number of suspension of the "symbol variation game" in the first special symbol suspension indicator 27c is "4". The first start opening winning command indicating that the number of reservations has been updated (increased) is transmitted to the effect control board 200. As a result, even in the effect control board 200, it is possible to recognize the number of suspension of the “symbol variation game” in the first special symbol suspension display 27c. In addition, when the number of reservations of the “symbol variation game” in the first special symbol suspension display 27 c is “4”, the first starting opening winning combination command may be transmitted to the effect control board 200.

(About the 2nd starting opening detection SW22a)
The second starting opening detection switch 22 a is provided inside the winning opening of the second starting opening 22 and is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 22. That is, the second start opening detection SW 22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected as entering. It will be done. Then, the main control board 100 which has input the detected information is for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the “2” ball as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the second starting opening 22. Do the processing. Further, the main control board 100 does not execute the "symbol variation game" in any of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, and the second special symbol hold display 27d. If the number of reservations is "0", the second special symbol display 27b is immediately controlled to execute the "symbol variation game", and the second special symbol suspension indicator 27d is the "symbol variation game". If the number of reservations is “1” to “3”, control is performed to suspend execution of the “symbol variation game”, and the number of suspension of “symbol variation game” in the second special symbol suspension display 27 d is When it is "4", control is performed so as not to hold the execution of the "symbol variation game". In addition, the main control board 100 is the "symbol variation game" in the second special symbol suspension indicator 27d except when the number of suspension of "symbol variation game" in the second special symbol suspension indicator 27d is "4". A second starting opening winning command indicating that the number of reservations has been updated (increased) is transmitted to the effect control board 200. As a result, even in the effect control board 200, it is possible to recognize the number of suspension of the "symbol variation game" in the second special symbol suspension display 27d. In addition, when the number of reservations of “symbol variation game” in the second special symbol suspension display 27 d is “4”, the second starting opening winning combination command may be transmitted to the effect control board 200.

(About the second start opening opening and closing solenoid 22b)
The second start opening / closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second start opening 22 and is a solenoid for causing the projecting member provided in the second start opening 22 to perform the opening / closing operation. In other words, the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. In this case, in order to open and close in the opening and closing mode shown in the “opening and closing mode of the second start port” of FIG.

(About normal winning opening detection SW23a)
The normal winning opening detection switch 23a is provided inside the winning opening of the normal winning opening 23 of the gaming board 6, and is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the normal winning opening 23. That is, the normal winning opening detection SW 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected as entering. It will be Then, the main control board 100 which has input the detected information, is a process for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the “8” ball as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the normal winning opening 23. I do.

(About the big winning opening detection SW24a)
The special winning opening detection SW 24 a is provided inside the winning opening of the special winning opening 24 of the gaming board 6 and is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 24. That is, the special winning opening detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the detected information is input to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected as entering. It will be Then, the main control board 100 which has input the detected information is a processing for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the “10” ball as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the big winning opening 24. I do. Further, the main control board 100 transmits, to the effect control board 200, a special winning opening winning command indicating that the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 24. Thereby, also in the effect control board 200, it is possible to recognize the ball entering situation of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 24.

(About the big winning opening opening and closing solenoid 24b)
The special winning opening / closing solenoid 24b is provided at the rear of the special winning opening 24 and is a solenoid for causing the opening / closing door provided in the above-mentioned special winning opening 24 to perform an opening / closing operation. That is, the special winning opening on-off solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hitting determination process". In order to open and close the open / close door over the number of rounds of application of FIG. 6A described later, drive control of the special winning opening open / close solenoid 24b is performed.

(About out port detection SW 25a)
The out-port detection SW 25 a is provided inside the entrance of the out-port 25, and is an SW for detecting that the gaming ball has entered the out-port 25. That is, the out-port detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. It will be. Thereby, the main control substrate 100 can grasp the number of out balls.

(About the first special symbol display 27a)
The first special symbol display 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. It is a display to do. That is, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 is the "symbol variation game" in the first special symbol display 27a. When the execution condition is satisfied, the "special symbol variation game" is controlled to be displayed on the first special symbol display 27a. It should be noted that the execution condition of the "symbol variation game" in the first special symbol display 27a is not satisfied in the process of step S103-2-4 in the "special symbol variation start process" (see FIG. 12) described later. When it was done

(About the second special symbol display 27b)
The second special symbol display 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 22. It is a display to do. That is, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 is the "symbol variation game" in the second special symbol display 27b. If the execution condition is satisfied, the second special symbol display 27b controls to display the "symbol variation game". It should be noted that the execution condition of the "symbol variation game" in the second special symbol display 27b is established in the process of step S103-2-1 in the "special symbol variation start process" (see FIG. 12) Time is applicable.

(For the first special symbol hold display 27c)
The first special symbol hold display 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100, and the "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. It is a display for displaying the number of reservations. That is, the first special symbol hold display 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the first starting opening detection SW 21a. Is input, the display control of the first special symbol hold display 27c is performed (the light is turned on or the light is turned on) when the upper limit (4 pieces) of the hold is not reached. On the other hand, when the "symbol change game" based on the game ball entering the currently changing first starting opening 21 is finished, the display control of the first special symbol hold display 27c is performed (from blinking to lighting or lighting) Turn off the lights).

(About the second special symbol hold display 27d)
The second special symbol hold display 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100, and the "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 22. It is a display for displaying the number of reservations. That is, the second special symbol hold display 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 detects the game ball from the second starting opening detection SW 22a. If is input, the second special symbol hold display 27d is subjected to display control when it does not reach the hold upper limit value (“4” pieces) (from off to on or from on to off). On the other hand, when the "symbol change game" based on the game ball entering the currently changing second starting opening 22 ends, the display control of the second special symbol hold display 27d is performed (from blinking to lighting or lighting) Turn off the lights).

(About normal symbol display 27e)
The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a "normal symbol variation game" which is display-controlled by the main control board 100. That is, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 is under the execution condition of the "normal symbol variation game" in the normal symbol display 27e When it is established, the "normal symbol variation game" is controlled to be displayed on the normal symbol display 27e.

(About normal symbol hold display 27f)
The normal symbol retention display 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100, and the number of "normal symbol variation games" suspension is based on the passage of the game ball to the gate member 20. It is a display for displaying. That is, the normal symbol hold display 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 holds the information when the game ball is detected from the gate detection SW 20a. When the upper limit value ("4") of has not been reached, the display control of the normal symbol hold display 27f is performed (the light is turned on or the light is blinked). On the other hand, when the "normal symbol variation game" which is currently changing is finished, the display control of the normal symbol hold display 27f is performed (from blinking to lighting or from lighting to off).

(About the round indicator 27g)
The round indicator 27g is provided on the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display for displaying the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 24 in the above-mentioned hit game. That is, the round display 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the "symbol variation game" determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hitting determination process" is ended, and the first At the timing of displaying a special symbol (for example, "7") indicating a hit on the special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, it controls to turn on the round indicator 27g corresponding to the determined hit game. Then, when the winning game is being executed, the control of turning on the round indicator 27g is continued and when the hitting game is over, the control of round indicator 27g is turned off. In the present embodiment, the round indicator 27g is provided because two types of number of rounds are provided, but if only one type of round number is provided, it is necessary to provide the round indicator 27g. Absent.

(About the setting change device 31)
The setting change device 31 is provided on the rear side of the middle frame 3 and is a device for setting a setting value to be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, as described in the description of FIG. 2 above, the setting change device 31 includes the setting change key hole 31a, the setting change button 31b, the setting confirmation button 31c, and the setting display unit 31d. When the setting change key is inserted into the key hole 31a and rotated 90 degrees, information indicating that it is in that state is input to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 sets the current setting value in the setting display portion 31d. Control to display In addition, when the setting change button 31b is operated in a state where the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key hole 31a and turned 90 degrees, information indicating that the button is operated is input to the main control board 100 and the main control board 100 The control board 100 performs control to display the setting value of the next stage of the current setting value on the setting display unit 31 d. For example, when the setting change button 31b is operated while the setting value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting value "2" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, and the setting value "2" is displayed. When the setting change button 31b is operated while displaying on the setting display unit 31d, the setting value "3" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, and the setting value "3" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. When the setting change button 31b is operated, the setting value "4" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, and when the setting value "4" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting change button 31b is displayed. When the button is operated, the setting value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. In addition, when the current setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, when the setting determination button 31c is operated, information indicating that the setting is operated is input to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 The setting value displayed on the setting display unit 31 d is stored in the main RAM 103. After that, the game control is performed based on the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 (for example, it corresponds to the setting value shown in FIGS. 5A-1 to 5A-4). Refer to the special symbol hit determination table).

(About the light emitting device 9)
The light emitting device 9 is composed of a lamp, an LED or the like as described in FIG. 1 and can decorate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by light emission. That is, the light emitting device 9 and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the light emitting device 9 emits light by control of the effect control board 200.

(About the speaker 10)
The speaker 10 can output voice and sound effects as described with reference to FIG. Further, when the information in the closed state is not input from the above-described frame opening detection switch 3a, it is possible to output a notification sound that the middle frame 3 is in the open state. That is, the speaker 10 and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, and the like, and the above-described sound is output from the speaker 10 by the control of the effect control board 200.

(About the panel lighting device 29)
The board illumination device 29 is provided on the game board 6 and, like the light emitting device 9 provided on the glass frame 4 described above, can decorate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by light emission. That is, the board illumination device 29 and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board or the like, and the board illumination device 29 emits light under the control of the effect control board 200. In addition, you may provide the light-guide plate which makes it possible to display a predetermined image by projecting light as board illuminating device 29. FIG.

(About the panel drive device 30)
The board drive device 30 is provided, for example, on the game board 6 and the movable body 28, and is configured of a motor or the like for moving the movable body 28 in the vertical direction. That is, the board drive device 30 and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and the board drive device 30 controls driving by control of the effect control board 200.

(About movable body 28)
The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is configured to move in the vertical direction, for example, in the case of executing "a movable body advance notice" described later. Here, the “movable” of the movable body 28 includes “falling”, “swinging”, “rotation” and the like in “previous movable body preview” shown in FIG. 20 described later.

(About effect button detection SW 14a)
The effect button detection SW 14 a is provided on the effect button 14 and is a SW for detecting that the player has pressed the effect button 14 when the effect button 14 is in the operation effective period. That is, the effect button detection SW 14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is to be input to the effect control board 200. ing. Then, the effect control board 200 which has input information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed, controls the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 14 through the image display device 26 or the speaker 10. Here, the effect button 14 sets, for example, an operation effective period over a predetermined time in the “symbol variation game”, and the effect button detection SW 14 a detects only pressing when the operation effective period is set.

(About the production lever detection SW 15a)
The effect lever detection SW 15 a is provided on the effect lever 15 and is a switch for detecting that the player operates the effect lever 15 when the effect lever 15 is in the operation effective period. That is, the effect lever detection SW 15a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. ing. Then, the effect control board 200 having input information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated controls the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 or the speaker 10. Here, for example, in the “symbol variation game”, the effect lever 15 sets an operation valid period over a predetermined time, and the effect lever detection SW 15 a detects only the operation when the operation valid period is set.

(About the cross key detection SW 16a)
The cross key detection switch 16 a is provided on the cross key button 16 and is a switch for detecting that the player has pressed the cross key button 16. That is, the cross key detection SW 16a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. It has become. As described above, it is possible to adjust the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9 and the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26 described later by operating the cross key button 16. Specifically, pressing the upper direction button of the cross key button 16 can increase the light amount (stepwise), and pressing the lower direction button of the cross key button 16 lowers the light amount (stepwise) The volume can be raised (stepwise) by pressing the right button of the cross key button 16, and the volume can be lowered (stepwise) by pressing the left button of the arrow key 16. . The light amount may be set in three steps of “strong”, “medium”, and “weak”, and may be set in five further subdivided steps. Also, the sound volume may be set in three levels of "high", "medium", and "low", or may be set in five further subdivided levels. Further, a level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the light amount or the volume, or an adjustment sound may be emitted. In addition, although the adjustment of the light amount and the adjustment of the volume can be performed when the "symbol variation game" is not performed, it may be executable even when the "symbol variation game" is performed. . In this case, it is preferable to perform adjustment by outputting the adjustment sound without displaying the above-described level gauge image or adjustment sound, or by displaying in a small size and at a small volume. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect image corresponding to the “symbol variation game” and the effect sound from being disturbed by the level gauge image and the adjustment sound.

(About special symbol hit judgment table)
The special symbol hitting determination tables shown in FIGS. 5A-1 to 5A-4 are stored in the main ROM 102. Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change device 31 described above can set the setting value of the “4” stage. Then, when “1” is set as the setting value, main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol winning judgment table for setting value “1” shown in (A-1) and “special symbol winning judgment processing”. If “2” is set as the set value, “per special symbol determination processing” is performed with reference to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value “2” shown in (A-2), When "3" is set as the setting value, "per special symbol hitting determination processing" is performed with reference to the special symbol hitting determination table for the setting value "3" shown in (A-3), and as the setting value When "4" is set, the "special symbol hitting determination process" is performed with reference to the special symbol hitting determination table for the setting value "4" shown in (A-4). In addition, even if the game ball enters the first start opening 21 or the game ball enters the second start opening 22 with "first start opening common to the second start opening", the special reference It shows that the symbol hitting determination table is common. The setting value that can be set by the setting change device 31 is not limited to the “4” level, and can be any value. For example, it may be "6" stages or "3" stages.

  In the special symbol winning determination table for the setting value “1” of (A-1), the “special symbol hitting determination” is performed when the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” and when the “time saving gaming state” is When the probability of being judged as "hit" in the process is "1/280" and the probability of being judged as "loss" is "279/280" and the gaming state is "probable variation gaming state" In the “special symbol winning determination process”, the probability of being determined as “hit” is “1/28” and the probability of being determined as “loss” is “27/28”. That is, when the gaming state is the "probable variation gaming state", the probability of being determined as a "hit" fluctuates by "10" times that in the "ordinary gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state". It can be said that the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player compared to the “normal gaming state” and the “time-saving gaming state”. Also, in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probable gaming state", as compared with the "normal gaming state", as shown in FIG. 5 (B) described later and FIG 6 (B) described later, "normal" In the “pattern hit determination process”, the “open / close mode” is selected as the open / close mode of the projecting member of the second starting opening 22 when the “open” is easily hit and the hit is hit. The game state is the most advantageous game state for the player, then the "time-saving game state" is the advantageous game state for the player, and the "normal game state" is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In the following description, "normal gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" may be collectively referred to as "low probability state", and "probability changing gaming state" may be referred to as "high probability state" There is. In addition, "low probability state" may be referred to as "non-shortening" or "non-single state", and "probability changing gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" are collectively referred to as "shorting or non-changing state". In some cases, it may be referred to as "in or out", or "in an improvement in ball pitch".

  In the special symbol winning determination table for the setting value “2” of (A-2), “special symbol hitting determination” when the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” and when the “time saving gaming state” is When the probability that it is determined to be "hit" in the process is "1/290" and the probability that it is determined to be "loss" is "289/290" and the gaming state is "probable variation gaming state" In the “special symbol hitting determination process”, the probability of being determined to be “hit” is “1/29”, and the probability of being determined to be “loss” is “28/29”. Therefore, when "2" is set as the set value, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination process" is lower than when "1" is set as the set value, It is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the special symbol winning determination table for the setting value “3” of (A-3), “special symbol hitting determination” when the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” and when the “time saving gaming state” is When the probability of being judged as "hit" in the process is "1/300" and the probability of being judged as "loss" is "299/300" and the gaming state is "probable changing gaming state" In the “special symbol winning determination process”, the probability of being determined as “hit” is “1/30”, and the probability of being determined as “loss” is “29/30”. Therefore, when "3" is set as the set value, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination process" is lower than when "2" is set as the set value, It is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the special symbol winning determination table for the setting value “4” of (A-4), “special symbol hitting determination” when the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” and when the “time saving gaming state” is When the probability that it is determined to be "hit" in the process is "1/310" and the probability that it is determined to be "loss" is "309/310" and the gaming state is "probable variation gaming state" In the “special symbol winning determination process”, the probability of being determined as “hit” is “1/31”, and the probability of being determined as “loss” is “30/31”. Therefore, when "4" is set as the set value, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination process" is lower than when "3" is set as the set value, It is disadvantageous for the player. That is, in the setting value, the setting value “1” is the setting value most advantageous to the player, the setting value “2” is the setting value advantageous to the player, and then the setting value “3” is the player It is an advantageous setting value, and the setting value “4” is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player.

(About the normal symbol hitting judgment table)
The normal symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5B is stored in the main ROM 102. And, when the gaming state is "normal gaming state", the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "normal symbol hitting determination process" is "4/256", the probability of being determined as "loss" is " It is 252/256 ", and when it is in" time saving game state "and in" probable change gaming state ", the probability that it is determined to be" hit "in" ordinary symbol hitting determination processing "is" 251 ". The probability of being judged as "lost" is "5/256" at / 256 ". Therefore, it is easier to be determined as a "hit" in the "normal symbol hit determination process" when the "time saving game state" or the "probability game state" is in the "normal pattern hit determination process" than in the "normal game state". It can be said that it is a game state advantageous to the person. In the present embodiment, the set value is not provided in the normal symbol hit determination table, but the set value may be provided in the same manner as the special symbol hit determination table. For example, the set value “1” may be easier to hit in the normal symbol determination in comparison with the set value “2”.

(About the special symbol determination table)
The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 (A) is a "hit" as a result of the "special symbol hit determination process" being performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. In the case of “missing”, refer to the case of determining the special symbol to be determined and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a (1) A table for the first starting opening 21 and a gaming ball in the second starting opening 22 As a result of having performed "special symbol hitting determination processing" based on entering the ball, the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 27b in the case of "hit" and the case of "loss" And (2) a table for the second starting port 22 to be referred to in determining the second start port 22. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. Then, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol with reference to the table corresponding to the starting opening where the gaming ball has entered in the “special symbol determination process” (see FIG. 12) described later.

  And in the special symbol determination table of (1) of FIG. 6 (A), as a result of having performed "special symbol hitting determination processing", when it is "hit", main CPU101, "special symbol A", "," From the special symbol B "and the" special symbol C ", one of the special symbols is determined. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired special symbol determination random number is referred to, and one of the special symbols is selected. decide. For example, if the acquired special symbol determination random number is "0 to 9", "special symbol A" is determined, and if the acquired special symbol determination random number is "10 to 64" "special symbol B" If the acquired special symbol determination random number is "65 to 99", the "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbol is determined, "the number of award rounds" and "the game state after winning" are uniquely determined. When the "special symbol A" is determined, "10" rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds granted", and the "probable variation gaming state" is awarded as the "after-hit gaming state". In addition, when “special symbol B” is determined, “5” round is awarded as “the number of award rounds”, and “probable variation gaming state” is awarded as “playing state after hitting”. In addition, when “special symbol C” is determined, “10” rounds are awarded as “the number of award rounds”, and “normal gaming state” is awarded as the “after-hit gaming state”. On the other hand, as a result of the "special symbol winning determination process" being performed, if it is a "loss", the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol D", "special symbol D", "the number of rounds given", and Since "the game state after winning" is not defined, the winning game is not awarded.

  Further, in the special symbol determination table (2) of FIG. 6A, as a result of the "special symbol hitting determination processing" being performed, if it is "hit", the main CPU 101 selects "special symbol E," "," From "special symbol F", determine one of the special symbols. The specific determination method is the same as (1) of FIG. Then, for example, if the acquired special symbol determination random number is "0 to 64", "special symbol E" is determined, and if the acquired special symbol determination random number is "65 to 99" "special symbol Decide "F". When the "special symbol E" is determined, "10" rounds are awarded as the "number of award rounds", and the "probable variation gaming state" is awarded as the "after-hit gaming state". In addition, when “special symbol F” is determined, “10” rounds are awarded as “the number of award rounds”, and “normal gaming state” is awarded as the “after-hit gaming state”. On the other hand, as a result of the "special symbol hitting determination processing" being performed, when it is "loss", the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol G". As described above, the ratio in which the "probable variation gaming state" is given is "probability variation gaming state" since the first starting opening 21 is "65%" and the second starting opening 22 is also "65%". There is no difference between the first start port 21 and the second start port 22 in the rate of rushing into the vehicle. On the other hand, the "number of rounds to be granted" is based on the ball entering the first start hole 21 because the second start hole 22 is always given the "10" round and the "5" round is not provided. It can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded the winning game based on entering the second starting opening 22 than the playing the game. In the present embodiment, the setting value is not provided in the special symbol determination table, but the setting value may be provided. For example, the determination ratio of the special symbol may be different between the case where the setting value is “1” and the case where the setting value is “4”. In that case, the rush rate to the "probable variation gaming state" is common to all setting values, but the "number of rounds to be granted" may be made to differ in proportion for each setting value. For example, as the set value is “1”, the advantageous number of rounds may be easily provided, and as the set value is “4”, the advantageous number of rounds may be easily provided.

(About normal symbol determination table)
The normal symbol determination table of FIG. 6 (B) is stored in the main ROM 102, and as a result of the "normal symbol hit determination process" being performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate member 20, "hit" It is a table to be referred to when determining an ordinary symbol to be determined and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 27e depending on the case and the case of "losing". If the main CPU 101 is in the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed as a result of the "hit", the "normal symbol" is performed in the "normal symbol related process" In the "determination process", "normal symbol A" is determined, and in the case of "loss", "normal symbol B" is determined. In addition, main CPU101, when game state is “time saving game state”, when it is “probable variation game state”, as a result of “normal symbol hitting decision processing” being done, when it is “clash” In "normal symbol determination processing" performed in "normal symbol related processing", "normal symbol C" is determined, and in the case of "loss", "normal symbol D" is determined. In addition, also in a normal symbol, the content provided is uniquely defined similarly to the special symbol mentioned above. When "normal symbol A" is determined, the projecting member of the second start opening 22 opens "one" times with "0.9 S", and when "normal symbol B" is determined, the second start opening The 22 projecting members do not open. Moreover, when the "normal symbol C" is determined, the projecting member of the second start opening 22 is opened "3 times" with "1.8S", and when the "normal symbol D" is determined, the second The projecting member of the starting opening 22 does not open. Therefore, the opening / closing mode of the projecting member of the second starting opening 22 when the "time saving gaming state" or the "probability changing gaming state" is "hit" in comparison with the "normal gaming state". Is advantageous to the player, it can be said that the game state is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the set value is not provided in the normal symbol determination table, but the set value may be provided in the same manner as the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of being judged as a hit in the “normal symbol hitting determination process” may be different for each setting value, and in the case of the setting value “1”, it is easier to hit than in the case of the setting value “4”. It may be or vice versa. In addition, the opening and closing mode of the second start port 22 may be different for each set value. For example, in the case of the setting value “1”, opening and closing may be performed in an advantageous opening and closing manner as compared to the case of the setting value “4”, or vice versa.

(About special symbol change pattern table)
The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 7 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table to be referred to when determining the variation time in the “symbol variation game”. If the main CPU 101 is in the "normal game state" and the result of the "special symbol hitting determination process" is "losing", the main CPU 101 performs the "variation pattern 1" to the "variation pattern 5" From among, determine one of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22, a random number for determining a variation pattern is acquired, and the random number for determining the acquired variation pattern is referred to ,, determine one of the variation patterns. Although not shown, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22, the random number for reach determination is acquired, and the random number for reach determination corresponds to the random number for executing the reach. If one of the "fluctuation pattern 2" to "fluctuation pattern 5" is selected, and one of the reach determination random numbers does not correspond to the random number for executing reach, "fluctuation pattern 1" is selected. It may be determined. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" and the result of the "special symbol hitting determination processing" is "clashing", the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the variation pattern. One of the variation patterns is determined from “variation pattern 6” to “variation pattern 11”.

  And if a fluctuation pattern is determined, "the contents of production" and "the fluctuation time" (number of seconds S) will be decided uniquely. When the “variation pattern 1” is determined, “normal variation” is determined as “effect content”, and “7S” is determined as “variation time”. Here, "normal fluctuation" refers to fluctuation that does not reach reach. Further, when "variation pattern 2" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as "effect content", and "15S" is determined as "variation time". Here, "normal reach" refers to a reach that performs reach but does not perform developmental effects (e.g., an effect of changing the inside decorative symbol image 26b after temporarily displaying with temporary loss). Since the selection rate at the time of hitting is low and the selection rate at the time of losing is high, the degree of expectation of hitting is positioned as a low reach. Further, when "variation pattern 3" is determined, "super reach" is determined as "effect content", and "40S" is determined as "variation time". Here, "super reach" refers to a reach that displays an actual image on the image display device 26 by performing developmental effects during reach (normal reach) execution, for example, at the time of "hit". The selection ratio is higher than "normal reach", and the selection ratio at the time of "loss" is configured lower than "normal reach", so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting than "normal reach". In addition, when “variation pattern 4” is determined, “pseudo-run 2 normal reach” is determined as “effect content”, and “50S” is determined as “variation time”. Although “pseudo-ha” will be described in detail later, “bake-ha 2 normal reach” has a higher expectation of hitting than “normal reach” alone, and a reach with a falling expectation of hitting than “super reach”. It is positioned as In addition, when “the fluctuation pattern 5” is determined, “the pseudo ream 3 super reach” is determined as “the contents of the effect”, and “70S” is determined as the “variation time”. The “Simulated Series 3 Super Reach” is positioned as a reach with higher expectations than “Super Reach” alone. It should be noted that "fluctuation pattern 6" to "fluctuation pattern 9" have only differences between "fluctuation pattern 2" to "fluctuation pattern 5" and "loss" or "hit", and the effect content and fluctuation time are the same. , I omit the explanation.

  Further, when the “variation pattern 10” is determined, “pseudo ream 4 super reach” is determined as the “content of effect”, and “90S” is determined as the “variation time”. Here, since “pseudo ream 4 super reach” is a variation pattern selected only in the case of “hit”, when “pseudo ream” to be described later is performed “4” times, “simulation reed 4 super reach” is performed at that time. The win is fixed. Further, when the “variation pattern 11” is determined, “all rotation reach” is determined as the “content of effect”, and “120S” is determined as the “variation time”. Here, "full rotation reach" refers to the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", This is a reach which is scrolled in a state of being aligned with "666", "777", and "888", for example, and finally displayed as "777". The “variation pattern 11” may be selected only when the “special symbol A” in FIG. 6 is determined. In this case, since the "probable change gaming state" is given not only as the "performing" but also as the playing state after the hit, the player is asked to perform the "full rotation reach" to be played Can lead to the improvement of game entertainment.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 performs the "special symbol hit determination process" when the gaming state is the "time-saving gaming state" and the "probable changing gaming state", the main CPU 101 is in the case of "losing" as a result. And one of the “variation patterns 12” to “variation patterns 15” is determined. When the “variation pattern 12” is determined, “shortened fluctuation” is determined as “effect content”, and “2S” is determined as “variation time”. Here, "shortened fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that causes the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c to be simultaneously stopped without reaching, and the gaming state is "time-saving game As a result of the "special symbol hitting determination processing" being performed in the "state" and the "probable variation gaming state", in the case of "loss", this "shortened fluctuation" is easily selected. Because of this, "time-saving gaming state" and "probable changing gaming state" can be efficiently digested. Further, when the “variation pattern 13” is determined, “reach reach” is determined as the “content of effect”, and “10S” is determined as the “variation time”. Here, “reach around” refers to, for example, temporarily stopping display of the “7” symbol as the left decorative symbol image 26 a and asking as to whether or not the “7” symbol is displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26 c. And, it is an effect to ask whether reach is formed. As a result of performing "reach around", for example, when the "8" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, no reach is formed, and for example, the "7" symbol is tentatively displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c. When the stop display is performed, a reach is formed, and it is developed into "variation in super short" in "variation pattern 15" and "variation pattern 17" described later. In addition, when “the variation pattern 14” is determined, “the variation short-sized super reach” is determined as the “content of effect”, and “30S” is determined as the “variation time”. Here, "varying and super middle reach" refers to "time reach gaming state" and "super reach" dedicated to "time change gaming state", which is different from "super reach" performed in "normal game state" ing. Further, when the “variation pattern 15” is determined, “reach reach → change in short / super medium super reach” is determined as the “content of effect”, and “40S” is determined as the “variation time”. As for "fluctuation pattern 16" and "fluctuation pattern 17", there is only the difference between "fluctuation pattern 14" and "fluctuation pattern 15" and "loss" or "hit", and the presentation content and fluctuation time are the same. I omit explanation. In addition, the selection ratio at the time of “hit” → “change in short“ super reach ”is higher than that in“ change in short “super reach”, and the selection ratio at “lost” is higher than “change in short“ super reach ” Because it is configured low, it can be positioned as a reach with a higher degree of expectation per hit than the "short and medium super reach".

  The above-mentioned special symbol variation patterns are not limited to those listed in FIG. 7 and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns. For example, even in the normal gaming state, "shortened fluctuation" (2S) may be provided. Also, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be made different depending on the number of holding balls of the "symbol variation game" of the first starting opening 21, or the number of holding balls of the "symbol variation game" of the second starting opening 22. The special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be different. For example, in the case of "losing", when the number of holding balls is "4", "normal fluctuation" of "variation pattern 1" is selected rather than the case where the number of holding balls is "1". You may make it easy and improve the operation of the game. In addition, when a loss is determined in the "time saving gaming state" or the "probability changing gaming state", as a result of starting the "symbol variation game" of the second starting opening 22, the number of holding balls in the second starting opening 22 is In the case of “0”, for example, it is possible to select a 30 s suspension normal fluctuation (loss), and secure a time for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 22. Further, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the setting value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each setting value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that is selected only by the setting value may be provided. In this way, it is possible to estimate (or grasp) what the set value is from the effect contents of the special symbol variation pattern that has been executed, which leads to the improvement of the game fun.

(About control processing performed by main CPU 101)
Control processing performed by the main CPU 101 will be described using FIGS. 8 to 14. The control program shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 14 is stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 reads the control program from the main ROM 102 and performs control processing according to the read control program.

(About main control board main processing)
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing performed in the main control board 100. The processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and a voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process to initialize the value and the like of a register provided therein. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key hole 31a in the setting change device 31, and the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees. As a result, when the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees, the process proceeds to step S3. When the setting change key is not rotated 90 degrees, the process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the frame opening detection SW is ON. For example, the process is determined based on whether or not the information in the closed state is input to the main control board 100 from the frame open detection SW 3 a. As a result, when the frame open detection SW is ON (closed), the process proceeds to step S4, and when the frame open detection SW is not ON (open), the process proceeds to step S7. Do.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 performs an error setting process. For example, a command or the like relating to error information is set so that notification of an error is continued via the speaker 10 or the like unless an error release operation is performed by the administrator of the gaming machine. In addition, since the change operation of the setting value is an operation performed by the administrator by opening the middle frame 3 from the outer frame 2, the setting change key is used although the middle frame 3 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. The event of being rotated and being in the setting change position is likely to have some sort of fraud. In such a case, an error is made in step S4. Then, after the processing is completed, the process waits until an error release operation is performed by the administrator of the gaming machine. The details of the error notification performed on the effect control board 200 will be described later.

(Step S5)
At step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear SW is ON. Although the RAM clear SW is not shown in FIG. 2, it is a SW provided on the back of the middle frame 3. For example, if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear SW, It is determined that the RAM clear SW is ON. As a result, when the RAM clear SW is ON, the process proceeds to step S6, and when the RAM clear SW is not ON, the process proceeds to step S12. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while the setting change key is turned 90 degrees and the RAM clear SW is pressed, the process in step S2 described above is prioritized. The process of step S5 may be prioritized.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 initializes an area of the main RAM 103 (except for the area where the setting value is stored). For example, the value held at the time of power shutoff is initialized in the process, and is initialized in the process when the game store is closed in the “time saving game state” or the “probability game state”. By this, the "normal game state" is set. When the initialization of the main RAM 103 is completed, the process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S7)
At step S7, the main CPU 101 initializes an area of the main RAM 103 (including an area where setting values are stored). For example, the value held at the time of power shutoff is initialized in the process, and is initialized in the process when the game store is closed in the “time saving game state” or the “probability game state”. By this, the "normal game state" is set. When the initialization of the main RAM 103 is completed, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 sets information indicating that the setting value is being changed in the command transmission area provided in the output port of the main control board 100. Then, the command set in the command transmission area is transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the command transmission process of the main control board timer interrupt process described later. In addition, the presentation aspect and alerting | reporting aspect based on having received the said command (the presentation control board 200) are mentioned later. Then, when a command indicating that the setting value is being changed is set, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 performs processing of switching the setting value each time a signal indicating that the setting change button 31b in the setting change device 31 has been operated is input. For example, when the setting value is “1”, when the signal for which the setting change button is operated is input, the setting value is switched to “2”, and when the setting value is “2”, the setting change button is operated. When the signal is input, the set value is switched to "3", and when the set value is "3", when the signal for which the setting change button is operated is input, the set value is switched to "4", and the set value "4" And when the signal for which the setting change button is operated is input, the setting value is switched to “1”. The switched setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31 d as described above. Then, when the setting value change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
At step S10, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there has been a setting value fixing operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting value fixing operation has been performed, based on whether or not the information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c described above has been operated is input. As a result, when information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c has been operated is input, the process proceeds to step S11, and when information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c is operated is not input, the relevant information Loop the process. It should be noted that the setting change key may not be returned from the position rotated 90 degrees unless the information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c is operated is input, or the setting confirmation button 31c is operated. However, when the setting change key is returned to the original position from the position rotated 90 degrees, it may be determined that the setting value fixing operation has been performed.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 stores the set value in the main RAM 103. For example, when the setting value is “1”, the setting value “1” is stored in the main RAM 103 when the setting value fixing operation is performed, and the setting value fixing operation is performed when the setting value is “2”. If the setting value “2” is stored in the main RAM 103 and the setting value is “3”, the setting value “3” is stored in the main RAM 103 when the setting value finalization operation is performed. When the setting value is “4” and the setting value fixing operation is performed, the setting value “4” is stored in the main RAM 103. After the set value is stored in the main RAM 103 in the processing, the main CPU 101 proceeds to play a game based on the set value stored in the main RAM 103 unless a change operation of the set value in FIG. 8 is performed thereafter. It will be done. When the set value is stored in the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 sets information (setting value information command) related to the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 in the above-mentioned command transmission area. For example, when the setting value "1" is stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11, a command indicating information of the setting value "1" is set, and when the setting value "2" is stored, the setting value "2" is stored. When a command indicating information is set and the setting value "3" is stored, a command indicating information of the setting value "3" is set. Then, the command set in the command transmission area is transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the command transmission process of the main control board timer interrupt process described later. In addition, the presentation aspect and alerting | reporting aspect based on having received the said command (the presentation control board 200) are mentioned later. Then, when a command indicating information on setting values is set, the process proceeds to step S13.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value information command is set and transmitted to the effect control board 200 only in the present processing, but, for example, the special processing of FIG. In the symbol variation start process, each variation may be transmitted. If configured in this way, even if the setting value information command set in this processing can not be transmitted to the effect control board 200 due to a command transmission error, then the game ball is in one of the starting openings When the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 12 is performed after entering the ball, the set value information command can be transmitted to the effect control board 200. When setting value information command is set and transmitted to the effect control board 200 only in the present process, the effect control board 200 can not be transmitted to the effect control board 200 due to a command transmission error. It may be notified that the reception has not been normally performed.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 prohibits interruption of the main control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the main control board main process. When the interrupt is inhibited, the process proceeds to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 updates initial value random numbers such as a random number for collision determination, a random number for determination of a special symbol, and a random number for variable pattern determination. Then, when the various random number update processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S15.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 permits interruption of the main control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the main control board main process. Then, when the interruption is permitted, the process proceeds to step S13 again, and thereafter, steps S13 to S15 are looped.

(About main control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main control board timer interrupt process performed in the main control board 100. The said process is a process regularly interrupted and performed to the above-mentioned main control board main process.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 updates initial value random numbers such as a random number for collision determination, a random number for determination of a special symbol, and a random number for determination of a variation pattern. Then, when various random number updating processes in one interruption cycle are completed, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 detects an input from each SW shown in FIG. The process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, after detecting an input from each SW in one interrupt cycle, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs processing associated with the special symbol. The process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing related to the special symbol in one interruption cycle is finished, the processing is shifted to step S104.

(Step S104)
At step S104, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to a normal symbol. For example, when the gaming ball passes through the gate member 20, the "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed, and the determination of the normal symbol and the process of determining the variation time of the normal symbol are performed. Then, when the process related to the normal symbol in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a process related to the payout of the game ball. For example, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the input SW detection process of step S102, the command transmission area is transmitted to transmit a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 in order to pay out the corresponding winning ball. The payout command signal is set to 0, and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300. Then, when the processing related to the payout of the gaming ball in one interruption cycle is ended, the processing is shifted to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing to transmit various commands to the effect control board 200. For example, in the processing, the main CPU 101 confirms whether a command is set in the command transmission area, and when the command is set, the set command is applied to the effect control board 200 or the payout control board 300. Send to. In addition, the command transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the process includes a command indicating information on the set value described above, a command set in a flowchart to be described later, and the like. Further, the command transmitted to the payout control board 300 in the process includes the above-mentioned payout command signal and the like. Then, when the command transmission process in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, when the main CPU 101 is a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 21, the display control (variation display of special symbols in the first special symbol display 27a) And the finalized display), and in the case of a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 22, in the second special symbol display 27b, display control (variation display and special symbol display in the special symbol Finalize). In addition, based on the fact that the game ball entered the respective starting opening, and the fact that “the symbol fluctuation game” in each starting opening is finished, 1st special symbol reservation indicator 27c and 2nd special symbol reservation The display control of the display 27d is also performed. And if display control of the special symbol in one interruption cycle is ended, processing shifts to Step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variation display and determination display) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 27e. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and that the "normal symbol variation game" has ended, display control of the normal symbol suspension display 27f is also performed. When the display control of the normal symbol is finished, the main control board timer interrupt process of one interrupt cycle is finished.

(About input SW detection process)
FIG. 10 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S102 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing an input SW detection process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S102-1)
In step S102-1, the main CPU 101 performs processing at the time of detecting the first starting opening. In the process, when the information that detects the entry of the gaming ball is input from the first starting opening detection SW 21a, the above-described is the above-described to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out the gaming ball of "3" ball as a winning ball. In the process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area, and in the storage area of the "symbol change game" corresponding to the first starting port 21, all of the "first storage area" to "fourth storage area" are suspended. It is determined whether or not it is in the suspended state, and if it is not in the suspended state, the random number value used for the processing of adding “1” for the suspension or the “special symbol hitting determination processing” is acquired and provided in the main RAM 103 In the process of storing in the reserve storage area of the “special symbol variation game” or when “1” is added to the reserve, the image display device 26 displays the above-mentioned command transmission area to increase and display the reserve ball image etc. The processing and the like to set the first start hole winning command performed. And if 1st starting opening detection time processing is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S102-2.

(Step S102-2)
In step S102-2, the main CPU 101 performs processing upon detection of a second starting opening. In addition, in the process, in order to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of “2” ball as the winning ball when the information that detects the entering of the game ball is input from the second starting opening detection SW 22 a In the process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above, and in the pending storage area of the "symbol variation game" corresponding to the second start port 22, all "first storage area" to "fourth storage area" It is determined whether or not it is in the state of being suspended, and if it is not in the state of being entirely suspended, the random value used for the processing of adding “1” to the suspension or the “special symbol winning determination processing” is acquired and provided in the main RAM 103 The above-described command for increasing the display of the holding ball image or the like in the image display device 26 when processing for storing in the holding storage area of the selected "special symbol variation game" or adding "1" to the holding It performs processing for setting the second start hole winning command signal region. And if 2nd starting opening detection time processing is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S102-3.

(Step S102-3)
In step S102-3, the main CPU 101 causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the "8" ball as a winning ball when the information detecting the entry of the game ball is inputted from the normal winning opening detection SW 23a. In the above, the processing for setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above is performed. In addition, in order to produce an effect corresponding to the game ball having entered the normal winning opening 23, a process of setting a normal winning opening winning command in the above-mentioned command transmission area is performed. Then, when the normal winning a prize opening detection process is ended, the process proceeds to step S102-4.

(Step S102-4)
In step S102-4, the main CPU 101 causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the gaming ball of "10" ball as the winning ball when the information detecting the entry of the gaming ball is input from the special winning opening detection SW 24a. In the above, the processing for setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above is performed. Further, in order to notify that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 24 by using the image display device 26 etc., the special winning opening ball detection signal is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area. The notification using the image display device 26 or the like is, for example, when a game ball exceeding 10 balls is detected by the large winning opening detection SW 24 a per round (also referred to as over winning), the effect is indicated by the image display device 26. Examples include display and notification by sound from the speaker 10. Then, when the special winning opening detection process ends, the process proceeds to step S102-5.

(Step S102-5)
In step S102-5, when the main CPU 101 inputs, from the gate detection SW 20a, the information for detecting the passage of the game ball, the number of reservations of the "normal symbol variation game" is smaller than "4", "normal" The number of reservations of the symbol variation game is added by “1” to obtain a random number used for “normal symbol hitting determination processing”, and stored in the suspension storage area of the “normal symbol variation game” provided in the main RAM 103 . In addition, in order to produce an effect corresponding to the game ball passing through the gate member 20, a process of setting a gate passing command in the above-described command transmission area is performed. Then, when the passing gate detection process is finished, the process proceeds to step S102-6.

(Step S102-6)
In step S102-6, the main CPU 101 performs an effect corresponding to the game ball entering the out slot 25 when the information detecting the entry of the game ball is input from the out port detection SW 25a. A process of setting an out-of-entry ball command in the command transmission area described above is performed. Then, when the out-port detection time process is ended, the process proceeds to step S103 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(About special symbol related processing)
FIG. 11 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S103 of the main control board timer interrupt process) showing the special symbol related process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S103-1)
In step S103-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a flag indicating that the main symbol is in the stopped state is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. For example, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 sets a value “1” indicating that the variation is in progress in the special symbol status flag storage area (step S103-2-13 in FIG. 12 described later). When stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, in the special symbol state flag storage area, a value “0” indicating “stopping” is set (step S103-4-3 in FIG. 13 described later). In addition, after setting the value "0" which shows in-stop, in being a hit, the value "2" which shows a hit game is set. Then, if the value "0" indicating the in-stop state is set, the process proceeds to step S103-2, and if the value "0" indicating the in-stop state is not set, the process proceeds to step S103-3. Migrate

(Step S103-2)
In step S103-2, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the special symbol variation start process is ended, the special symbol related process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-3)
In step S103-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a flag indicating that it is changing is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, if the value "1" indicating that variation is in progress is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4, and if the value "1" indicating variation in progress is not set, the procedure proceeds to step S103-5. Migrate

(Step S103-4)
In step S103-4, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol variation in progress processing shown in FIG. The process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the special symbol changing process is ended, the special symbol related process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5)
In step S103-5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value “0” indicating the in-stop state is not set and determines that the value “1” indicating the in-transition state is not set, the hit game is It is determined that the value "2" indicating "1" is set, and the hit game process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. The process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the winning game processing is ended, the special symbol related processing is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(About special symbol change start process)
FIG. 12 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S103-2 of the special symbol related process) showing the special symbol variation start process performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S103-2-1)
In step S 103-2-1, the main CPU 101 executes “first storage area” to “fourth storage area” in the suspension storage area of the “symbol variation game” corresponding to the second starting port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. Determine whether it is in a state of not being held by any of Then, when the number of reservations corresponding to the second start port 22 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S103-2-2, and the number of reservations corresponding to the second start port 22 is "0". In the case, the process proceeds to step S103-2-4.

(Step S103-2-2)
In step S103-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the number of reservations of the second starting port 22. As for the subtraction, as described in the above-mentioned "about the second starting opening 22", after sliding the judgment information (random number value) of "the storage area" to "the fourth storage area", It corresponds to emptying the storage area of “1”. Along with this, the display of the second special symbol hold display 27d also becomes a display mode ("flashing" to "lighting" or "lighting" to "lighting off") according to the number of reservations. And if "1" is subtracted from the number of pending | holding of the 2nd starting opening 22, a process will be transfered to step S103-2-3.

(Step S103-2-3)
In step S103-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets a second starting opening subtraction command in the above-described command transmission area in order to subtract and display the holding ball image and the like in the image display device 26. In addition, the presentation aspect and alerting | reporting aspect based on having received the said command (the presentation control board 200) are mentioned later. Then, when the second starting opening subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-2-8.

(Step S103-2-4)
In step S 103-2-4, the main CPU 101 executes “first storage area” to “fourth storage area” in the suspension storage area of “symbol variation game” corresponding to the first starting port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. Determine whether it is in a state of not being held by any of Then, when the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 21 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S103-2-5, and the number of reservations corresponding to the first start port 21 is "0". In the case, the process proceeds to step S103-2-6.

(Step S103-2-5)
In step S103-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the number of reservations of the first starting port 21. As for the subtraction, as described above in the section "About the first start port 21", after sliding the judgment information (random number value) of "the storage area" to "the fourth storage area", It corresponds to emptying the storage area of “1”. Along with this, the display of the first special symbol hold display 27c also becomes a display mode ("flashing" to "lighting" or "lighting" to "lights off") according to the number of reservations. And if "1" is subtracted from the number of pending | holding of the 1st starting opening 21, a process will be transfered to step S103-2-7.

(Step S103-2-6)
In step S103-2-6, the main CPU 101 determines that the player is not playing a game if the “symbol change game” is not performed for a predetermined time, and the model name and the manufacturer name are determined in the image display device 26. In order to display the demonstration screen to be displayed, the demonstration command is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area. In addition, the presentation aspect and alerting | reporting aspect based on having received the said command (the presentation control board 200) are mentioned later. Then, when the demonstration command is set, the special symbol variation start process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-2-7)
In step S103-2-7, the main CPU 101 sets the first starting opening subtraction command in the command transmission area described above in order to subtract and display the holding ball image and the like in the image display device 26. In addition, the presentation aspect and alerting | reporting aspect based on having received the said command (the presentation control board 200) are mentioned later. Then, when the first starting opening subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-2-8.

(Step S103-2-8)
In step S103-2-8, when the main CPU 101 subtracts the second starting opening hold and performs the processing, the main CPU 101 uses the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the second starting opening detection process. On the other hand, when the first starting opening hold is subtracted and the processing is performed, the determination information (random number value) is used to determine the winning using the determination information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first starting opening detection process. It is determined whether it is information (random number value). For example, if the set value is “1”, the random symbol value of “2” is present in the special symbol winning determination table in FIG. 5 and the random number value of “loss” is present in “558”. In the process, it is determined whether the above-mentioned acquired and stored determination information (random number value) corresponds to any of the “2” random number values. And when it corresponds, it determines with "performing", and when it corresponds to either of "558" of the random number values of the loss, it determines with "loss". Then, when the hit determination process of the special symbol is finished, the process proceeds to step S103-2-9. In the following steps S103-2-9 to S103-2-12, processing is performed based on the determination result (whether it is a hit or a loss) in step S103-2-8.

  In addition, when performing the special symbol winning determination processing, after reading the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. 8, the special symbol hitting determination table (see FIG. 5) corresponding to the read setting value is read After the setting value is stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. 8, the special symbol hitting determination table (see FIG. 5) corresponding to the stored setting value may be used. The special symbol hitting determination processing may be performed using the special symbol hitting determination table (see FIG. 5) stored in the main RAM 103 in the special symbol hitting determination processing.

(Step S103-2-9)
In step S103-2-9, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol to be displayed as a determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" in the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b. For example, the second start opening reserve is subtracted and the special symbol hitting determination processing is performed, and when it is determined, the table for (2) 2nd starting opening 22 in Figure 6 and the random number for the above-mentioned special symbol decision The special symbol is determined using and the first starting opening retention is subtracted and the special symbol hitting decision processing is done, when it is decided, the table for (1) 1st starting opening 21 in Figure 6, with, A special symbol is determined using the above-mentioned special symbol determination random numbers. Also, when it is determined that there is a loss, the special symbol of the loss is similarly determined. And if a special symbol is determined, processing will shift to Step S103-2-10.

(Step S103-2-10)
In step S103-2-10, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol in the "symbol variation game". For example, if it is determined that there is a loss in "the normal gaming state", one of the variation patterns is determined from "the variation pattern 1" to "the variation pattern 5", and it is determined to be the hit in the "normal gaming state". In the case where one of the "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 11" is determined to be one of the variation patterns, and it is determined that the "time saving game state" or the "probability variation gaming state" is a loss, the "variation pattern 12". If one of the variation patterns is determined from “variation pattern 15” and it is determined that the winning is in “time saving gaming state” or “probability variation gaming state”, “variation pattern 16” to “variation pattern 17” Determine one of the variation patterns from Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S103-2-11.

(Step S103-2-11)
In step S103-2-11, the main CPU 101 sets a command indicating the special symbol determined in step S103-2-9 in the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit it to the effect control board 200. For example, when "special symbol A" is determined in step S103-2-9, a symbol designation command indicating "special symbol A" is transmitted. In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200) is mentioned later. Then, when the symbol designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-2-12.

(Step S103-2-12)
In step S103-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S103-2-10 in the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit it to the effect control board 200. . For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S103-2-10, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is transmitted. In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200) is mentioned later. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-2-13.

(Step S103-2-13)
In step S103-2-13, the main CPU 101 sets a value “1” indicating that the variation is in progress in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This makes it possible to recognize that the special symbol is changing. Further, although not shown, in the processing, a timer relating to a variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern is set in the main RAM 103, and counting is started. Then, when the value “1” indicating that the variation is in progress is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the special symbol variation start process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

  As shown in the description of FIG. 12 above, in the present embodiment, if there is a hold of the second starting opening 22 in step S103-2-1, the special symbol winning determination processing is prioritized over the first starting opening 21. To do. This is because, as described above, it is advantageous for the player to be awarded the winning game based on entering the second starting opening 22, and the player is not disadvantaged. Consideration. In the present embodiment, priority is given to the second start port 22. However, the special symbol winning determination process is executed in the order in which the first start port 21 and the second start port 22 enter the ball. You may do so.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned FIG. 12, although it is the composition which performs only determination of "hit" or "loss", if it is determined not to be "hit", is it a "small hit" different from the hit game? It may be determined whether or not. Then, if it is determined to be "small hit", the "small hit game" is awarded to control the large winning opening 24 with an opening / closing mode which is more disadvantageous to the player than the "hit game" and the number of times of opening. You may

(About special symbol during processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S103-4 of the special symbol related process) showing the special symbol variation in progress processing performed in the main control board 100.

(Step S103-4-1)
In step S103-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the timer related to the fluctuation time set in the main RAM 103 described above has elapsed. For example, when "variation pattern 8" is determined and "50S" is set in the timer, it is determined whether "50S" has elapsed. In addition, for the convenience of transmitting a symbol stop command described later to the effect control board 200, the timing when it is determined that the timer has elapsed may be advanced. For example, in the case of the “variation pattern 8”, it may be determined that the timer has reached “49 S” at the time when it has elapsed. In this way, a significant shift occurs between the timing when the special symbol is determined and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b and the timing when the decorative symbol is determined and displayed on the image display device 26. Can be prevented. And when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the process proceeds to step S103-4-2, and when the variation time of the special symbol has not passed, the special symbol variation processing is ended and the main control The process proceeds to step S104 of the substrate timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-2)
In step S 103-4-2, the main CPU 101 transmits the above-mentioned command transmission area to transmit to the effect control board 200 a symbol stop command for stopping the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 26. Set to In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200) is mentioned later. Then, when the symbol stop command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-3.

(Step S103-4-3)
In step S103-4-3, in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" indicating that the main CPU 101 is in the process of stopping. This makes it possible to recognize that the special symbol is at rest. Then, in the special symbol state flag storage area, when the value "0" indicating stopping is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-4.

(Step S103-4-4)
In step S103-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a value is set in the time saving number counter provided in the main RAM 103. The value of the time saving number counter is set in step S103-5-21 of the below-described hit game process (see FIG. 14). Then, when the value is set in the time reduction counter, the process proceeds to step S103-4-5, and when the value is not set in the time reduction counter, the process proceeds to step S103-4-9. Do.

(Step S103-4-5)
In step S103-4-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the time saving number counter (subtracts "1"). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter is subtracted ("1" is subtracted), the process proceeds to step S103-4-6.

(Step S103-4-6)
In step S103-4-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0". Then, if the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0", the process proceeds to step S103-4-7, and if the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not "0", step S103- Transfer the processing to 4-9.

(Step S103-4-7)
In step S103-4-7, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. For example, in the main RAM 103, a gaming state storage area is provided, and "0" is stored when in the normal gaming state, and "1" is stored when the time saving gaming state is in the definite variation gaming state Stores "2". Therefore, in the processing, “0” is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when “0” is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S103-4-8.

(Step S103-4-8)
In step S103-4-8, the main CPU 101 sets the above-described command transmission area in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the effect control board 200. In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200), a production | presentation aspect, a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when a game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-9.

(Step S103-4-9)
In step S103-4-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the "special symbol hitting determination process" in step S103-2-8 of Fig. 12 is "hit". When the determination result of the "special symbol hitting determination process" is "hit", the process proceeds to step S103-4-10, and when the determination result of the "special symbol hitting determination process" is not "hit", the special The symbol changing process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-10)
In step S103-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets a value “2” indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This makes it possible to recognize that the special symbol is being stopped and that it is a hit game. Then, when the value “2” indicating a winning game is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S103-4-11.

(Step S103-4-11)
In step S103-4-11, the main CPU 101 shifts to an opening notifying that the winning game has been started. For example, in the hit game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103, the state in the hit game is stored, and if it is the opening, "0" is set, and the big winning opening 24 is open. “1” is set, and “2” is set if it is an interval between rounds, and “3” is set if it is ending. Then, when "0" indicating the opening is set in the hit game state storage area, the process proceeds to step S103-4-12.

(Step S103-4-12)
In step S103-4-12, the main CPU 101 sets the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit an opening command for executing the effect corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the effect control board 200. In addition, an effect aspect based on having received the said command (effect control board 200), a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. When the opening command is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-13.

(Step S103-4-13)
In step S103-4-13, the main CPU 101 sets a time (for example, “10S”) corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the time corresponding to the opening is set, the special symbol variation in progress processing is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(About per game processing)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S103-5 of the special symbol related process) showing a winning game process performed on the main control board 100.

(Step S103-5-1)
In step S103-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening is in progress. It is determined whether "0" indicating the opening is set in the hit game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103 described above. When the special winning opening is opened in step S103-5-3, which will be described later, the value of the hit game state storage area changes from "0" to "1". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S103-5-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S103-5-5.

(Step S103-5-2)
In step S103-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether a time (for example, "10S") corresponding to the opening set in step S103-4-13 in FIG. 13 described above has elapsed. Then, if the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S103-5-3, and if the time corresponding to the opening has not elapsed, the hit game processing is ended, and the main control is performed. The process proceeds to step S104 of the substrate timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-3)
In step S103-5-3, the main CPU 101 drives the special winning opening / closing solenoid 24b to open the special winning opening 24. Thus, the first round of the hit game will be started. In the process, the value of the hit game state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the special winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S103-5-4. The main CPU 101 drives and controls the special winning opening / closing solenoid 24b based on the number of award rounds defined in the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process. For example, when "special symbol A" is determined, the large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled over "10" rounds, and when "special symbol B" is determined, the large winning opening over "5" rounds The drive control of the open / close solenoid 24b is performed.

(Step S103-5-4)
In step S103-5-4, the main CPU 101 sets the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit a round command for executing the effect corresponding to the winning game round to the effect control board 200. In addition, an effect aspect based on having received the said command (effect control board 200), a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when the round command is set, the hit game processing is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-5-5)
In step S103-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special winning opening is open. In the hit game state storage area provided in the above-described main RAM 103, it is determined whether "1" indicating that the special winning opening is open is set. Then, when the special winning opening is being opened, the processing proceeds to step S103-5-6, and when the special winning opening is not opening, the processing proceeds to step S103-5-9.

(Step S103-5-6)
In step S103-5-6, the main CPU 101 passes 29.5 S while the big winning opening 24 is open without detecting the entry of 10 balls by the big winning opening detection SW 24a, or the big winning opening detection It is determined whether or not the entry of 10 balls is detected by the SW 24a, or any of the special winning opening closing conditions is satisfied. Then, when the special winning opening closing condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S103-5-7. When the special winning opening closing condition is not satisfied, the winning game processing is ended, and the main control board timer is completed. The process proceeds to step S104 of the interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-7)
In step S103-5-7, the main CPU 101 shifts to an interval between rounds which constitutes a period from when the special winning opening 24 is closed to the next opening. In the processing, the value of the hit game state storage area is changed from “1” to “2”. Then, when "2" indicating an interval between rounds is set in the hit game state storage area, the process proceeds to step S103-5-8.

(Step S103-5-8)
In step S103-5-8, the main CPU 101 sets an inter-round interval command for causing the effect corresponding to the inter-round interval to be transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the above-described command transmission area. In addition, an effect aspect based on having received the said command (effect control board 200), a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when the interval command between rounds is set, the hit game processing is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-5-9)
In step S103-5-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an interval between rounds is in progress. It is determined whether or not "2" indicating an interval between rounds is set in the hit game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103 described above. And when it is in the interval between rounds, processing is moved to Step S103-5-10, and when it is not during the interval between rounds, processing is moved to Step S103-5-16.

(Step S103-5-10)
At step S103-5-10, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the final round is over. For example, as a result of updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds in step S103-5-13 described later, if the number of remaining rounds is “0”, it is determined that the final round is completed in the processing. And when it is the end time of the last round, processing is moved to Step S103-5-11, and when it is not the end time of the last round, processing is moved to Step S103-5-13.

(Step S103-5-11)
In step S103-5-11, the main CPU 101 shifts to an ending to notify that the winning game has ended. In the process, the value of the hit game state storage area is changed from "2" to "3". In addition, the time (for example, “10S”) corresponding to the ending of the winning game is set in the counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when "3" indicating ending is set in the winning game state storage area, the process proceeds to step S103-5-12.

(Step S103-5-12)
In step S103-5-12, the main CPU 101 sets the above-described command transmission area in order to transmit an ending command for executing a corresponding effect to the winning game to the effect control board 200. In addition, an effect aspect based on having received the said command (effect control board 200), a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when the ending command is set, the hit game processing is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-5-13)
In step S103-5-13, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter of the main RAM 103. Note that the updating method may be increment or decrement. For example, when “per 10 rounds” is given, “10” may be set to the round number counter of the main RAM 103 and decremented by 1 each time one round is digested, or the number of rounds of the main RAM 103 Instead of setting “10” in the counter, one increment may be performed for each round of digestion. Then, when the number of rounds is updated, the process proceeds to step S103-5-14.

(Step S103-5-14)
In step S103-5-14, the main CPU 101 drives the special winning opening / closing solenoid 24b to open the special winning opening 24. In the process, the value of the hit game state storage area is changed from “2” to “1”. Then, when the special winning opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S103-5-15.

(Step S103-5-15)
In step S103-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit, to the effect control board 200, a round command for executing an effect corresponding to the winning game round. Then, when the round command is set, the hit game processing is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-5-16)
In step S103-5-16, the main CPU 101 determines whether a time (for example, "10S") corresponding to the ending set in step S103-5-11 described above has elapsed. Then, if the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S103-5-17, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the hit game processing is ended, and the main control is performed. The process proceeds to step S104 of the substrate timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-17)
In step S103-5-17, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol determined in the above-mentioned "special symbol determination process" is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". And when the special symbol is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S103-5-18, and the special symbol is "special symbol A". If the symbol is neither "special symbol B" nor "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S103-5-20.

(Step S103-5-18)
In step S103-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, in the processing, "2" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "2" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S103-5-19. In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of times until the next winning game is given is made to be an infinite probability variation gaming state, it may be set to be a finite probability variation gaming state. For example, "10000" times may be set as the upper limit of the probability variation gaming state.

(Step S103-5-19)
In step S103-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets the above-described command transmission area in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the probable game state to the effect control board 200. In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200), a production | presentation aspect, a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when a game state command indicating that the game is in the probable game state is set, the hit game process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-20)
In step S103-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the processing, “1” is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "1" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S103-5-21.

(Step S103-5-21)
In step S103-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets “100” to the time saving number counter provided in the main RAM 103. As a result, the short game state "100" times starts from the next change. Then, when "100" is set in the time reduction number counter provided in the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S103-5-22.

(Step S103-5-22)
In step S103-5-22, the main CPU 101 sets the above-described command transmission area in order to transmit a gaming state command indicating that the time saving game state is to the effect control board 200. In addition, the process based on having received the said command (production control board 200), a production | presentation aspect, a notification mode etc. are mentioned later. Then, when the gaming state command indicating that it is in the time saving gaming state is set, the winning game processing is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S104 of the main control board timer interruption processing.

(About control processing performed by sub CPU 201)
Control processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The control program shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 and 16 is stored in the sub ROM 202. The sub CPU 201 reads the control program from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing according to the read control program.

(About effect control board main processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing performed in the effect control board 200. The processing is started by the sub CPU 201 of the effect control board 200 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and a voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub CPU 201 performs an initial setting process to initialize the value and the like of a register provided therein. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S201.

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub CPU 201 prohibits interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is inhibited, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub CPU 201 updates the effect random number. Then, when the process of updating the effect random number ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub CPU 201 permits interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, the process proceeds to step S201 again, and thereafter, steps S201 to S203 are looped.

(About effect control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing effect control substrate timer interrupt processing performed in the effect control substrate 200. The said process is a process regularly interrupted and performed to the above-mentioned production control board main process.

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area. Then, when the contents of the register in one interrupt cycle are saved in the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 201 performs main command reception processing. In the processing, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect or the like corresponding to the received main command. Although omitted in the flow chart, the details will be described in the following description “when the コ マ ン ド command is received”. Then, when the main command reception process in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs input processing of the operation device. For example, when the effect button 14 is operated, operation information is input from the effect button detection SW 14a, and when the effect lever 15 is operated, operation information is input from the effect lever detection SW 15a, and the cross key button 16 is operated If it has been, operation information is input from the arrow key detection switch 16a. When the sub CPU 201 receives the operation information, the sub CPU 201 performs control to execute effects using the image display device 26, the speaker 10, and the like. For example, when operation information is input from the effect button detection SW 14a, a character image is displayed on the image display device 26, and a voice effect by the character image is output from the speaker 10. Then, when the input process of the operation device in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for each gaming state. In this processing by each gaming state, according to whether it is currently "in the middle of variation", "in the middle of non-shortening", or "hit game", perform an effect that suggests the setting value described later Processing and the like are performed. For example, if the current gaming state is "probable gaming state" or "time saving gaming state" (that is, "in the middle of variation"), the processing shown in FIG. 30 to FIG. 32 is performed and the current gaming state is " In the case of the normal gaming state "(that is," not in change "), the processing shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 is performed, and the current gaming state is" hit game state "(that is," in winning game ") If it is, the process shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37 is performed. The details of each will be described later. Then, when each gaming state-specific processing in one interruption cycle is ended, the processing is shifted to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect contents determined in steps S301 to S303 in each of the effect devices (for example, the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, the drive device 30 for a panel, etc.) Output control of execution information etc. Thereby, in each effect device, an effect corresponding to an effect pattern variation pattern described later, an effect corresponding to an operation of the effect button 14 or the effect lever 15, an indication effect of an after-mentioned setting value, etc. are executed. It will be. Then, when the process of controlling the output to each rendering device in one interruption cycle is completed, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area in one interrupt cycle are returned to the register, the effect control board timer interrupt process in one interrupt cycle is ended.

  Here, when the main command is received in the main command reception process of step S301 described above, the main processes and the like performed by the sub CPU 201 for each received command will be described. The following commands include commands omitted from the flowchart executed by the main CPU 101 described above. Although there are commands other than the commands shown below, there are commands for which the description is omitted for convenience.

(When a frame open command is received)
The frame open command (not shown) is not limited to the case where the frame open detection SW 3a is not ON (open state) in step S3 of FIG. 8 or in step S3 of FIG. It is a command transmitted when the frame open detection switch 3a is not ON (open state) in the inserted state, and the sub CPU 201 receives the command from the speaker 10, and the door is opened. Control to output a sound such as “That's open” and display an image such as “the door is open” on the image display device 26, and a light emission pattern indicating that the frame is open to the light emitting device 9. Control to make it emit light. Thus, when the middle frame 3 or the like is opened contrary to the intention of the game store clerk, it can be made easy to notice that the opening is illegal.

(When an error command is received)
The error command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the error setting process is performed in step S4 of FIG. 8, and the sub CPU 201 detects “illegal” from the speaker 10 when the command is received. Control to display an image such as “during fraud detection” on the image display device 26, and emits light with a light emission pattern indicating that fraud detection is in progress on the light emitting device 9. Control to make it This makes it easy to notice that the setting value is illegal, when the setting value is about to be changed contrary to the intention of the gaming clerk. The error command is not limited to this. For example, when the magnetic sensor provided on the game board 6 detects an abnormal magnetism, an error command for notifying of the magnetic abnormality or the radio wave sensor provided on the game board 6 detects an abnormal radio wave. And an error command for notifying of radio wave abnormality. Also, if the game ball is not removed from the lower receiving plate 5b despite the fact that the game ball has been paid out in the hit game as an error command which is smaller than these errors, the game ball is removed from the lower case 5b. Error command to perform notification to prompt the user, or error command to perform notification to urge to be left-handed when right-handed is being performed when shifting to the normal game state after the end of the short-time game state Etc.

(When an initialization command is received)
The initialization command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the main RAM 103 is initialized in step S6 or step S7 of FIG. 8, and the sub CPU 201 receives the command and the effect control board 200 side is received. It also initializes the status etc. managed by. For example, in the probability variation gaming state, the image display device 26 displays a dedicated background image or the like in the probability variation gaming state, but when the command is received in the probability variation gaming state, the image display device 26 says "initializing" An image is displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a dedicated background image or the like in the normal gaming state is displayed. Also, in the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d, the initial appearance (for example, "123") is displayed (the command is received in the short time game state The same flow applies in the case of In addition, when the command is received in the normal gaming state, an image such as "initializing" is displayed in the image display device 26 in the same manner, and after a predetermined time elapses, a dedicated background image in the normal gaming state is again displayed. indicate. In addition, in the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d, an initial appearance (for example, "123") is displayed.

(When the "setting value changing command in Fig. 8" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 10 to output an audio such as "setting is being changed" and controls the image display 26 to display an image such as "setting being changed". Control is performed to emit light with a light emission pattern indicating that the setting is being changed. Thus, the gaming staff can know that the setting value is currently being changed.

(When the "set value information command in Fig. 8" is received)
The sub CPU 201 stores the setting value indicated by the setting value information command in the sub RAM 203. For example, when the setting value “1” is set in the main control board, the setting value information command related to the setting value “1” is transmitted, and the effect control board 200 having received this is set by the main control board 100 Recognizing that the value “1” is set, the setting value “1” is stored in the sub RAM 203. Thereby, in the effect control board 200, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the setting value set in the main control board 100 using the image display device 26 or the like. When the setting value information command is received, the effect corresponding to the command reception via the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc. is not performed, but the fact that the setting value is stored in the sub RAM 203 is You may make it alert | report. For example, the light emitting device 9 may emit light according to each setting value to notify that the setting value is stored in the sub RAM 203, or the speaker 10 “stored the setting value” It may be notified that the setting value has been stored in the sub RAM 203 by outputting a sound, and the setting value stored in the sub RAM 203 is displayed in the image display device 26 so that the setting is made in the sub RAM 203. It may be notified that the value has been stored.

(When the 1st starting opening prize winning command is received)
The first starting opening winning command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 21 is detected in step S102-1 of FIG. Upon reception, the sub CPU 201 displays the first starting opening holding ball image (first starting opening first holding ball image display area 26g to first starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26j) displayed on the image display device 26, [1] The starting opening reserved number image 26e is displayed to be increased. In addition, when performing pre-reading effect mentioned later, a prior determination command (not shown) is transmitted separately from a 1st starting opening prize winning command by step S102-1 of FIG. 10, A prior determination command and a 1st starting opening prize The first starting opening holding ball image (the first starting opening first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26j) to be displayed on the image display device 26 based on the command Or the speaker 10 outputs a sound effect indicating that the changed holding ball image is displayed.

(When the 2nd starting opening prize winning command is received)
The second starting opening prize winning command (not shown) is a command that is transmitted when the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 is detected in step S102-2 of FIG. Upon reception, the sub CPU 201 displays a second starting opening holding ball image (second starting opening first holding ball image display area 26k to second starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26n) displayed on the image display device 26, [2] The start opening hold number image 26f is displayed to be increased. In addition, when performing pre-reading effect mentioned later, a prior determination command (not shown) is transmitted separately from the 2nd starting opening winning a prize command at Step S102-2 of Drawing 10, and a prior determination command and the 2nd starting opening winning a prize The second starting opening holding ball image (the second starting opening first holding ball image display area 26k to the second starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26n) to be displayed on the image display device 26 based on the command Or the speaker 10 outputs a sound effect indicating that the changed holding ball image is displayed.

(When normal winning opening winning command is received)
The normal winning a prize opening winning command (not shown) is a command to be transmitted when the entry of the gaming ball to the normal winning a prize opening 23 is detected in step S102-3 of FIG. The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display an image to notify the ball entry, and controls the speaker 10 to output a notification sound to notify that a winning on the normal winning opening 23 has occurred.

(When receiving a special winning opening winning command)
The special winning opening winning command (not shown) is a command that is transmitted when the entry of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 24 is detected in step S102-4 of FIG. The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display the number of winning balls acquired in the hit game. In the case where the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of receptions of the special winning opening winning command per round, which is counted by the sub CPU 201, exceeds “10” (when the “over winning” described above occurs), the speaker 10 More specifically, control is performed to output a notification sound notifying that an over winning has occurred. Further, in the sub RAM 203, once transitioning to the "probable variation gaming state", and until transitioning to the "normal gaming state", including a pullback of the "time saving gaming state", winnings to the special winning opening winning command Count and store the number. That is, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a special winning opening winning number counter, and the counter changes to the winning game in the "probable variation gaming state" and to the winning game in the "time saving gaming state". The game is added to each hit of the game ball to the big winning opening 24 during the hit game, and is cleared when it is shifted to the “normal game state”. Then, the sub CPU 201 can calculate the number of winning balls in successive hit games from the value of the counter and the winning balls “10” of the big winning opening 24.

(When a gate passage command is received)
The gate passage command (not shown) is a command transmitted when passage of the game ball to the gate member 20 is detected in step S102-5 of FIG. 10, and the sub CPU 201 receives the command, In the image display device 26, control for displaying an image for notifying passage and control for outputting an alarm sound for notifying that passage to the gate member 20 has occurred from the speaker 10 are performed.

(When an out entry ball command is received)
The out slot entering ball command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the ball entry of the gaming ball to the out port 25 is detected in step S102-6 of FIG. The CPU 201 adds one to the value of the out-port entry ball counter provided in the sub RAM 203. Thereby, on the effect control board 200 side, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls entered into the out port 25.

(When "the first start opening subtraction command in Fig. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 updates (subtracts) the storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Thereby, the first starting opening holding ball image (the first starting opening first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting opening fourth holding ball image displaying area 26j) displayed in the image display device 26 or the first starting opening The reserved number image 26e is displayed by subtraction. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is executed, along with the subtraction display, the holding ball image which has already been changed is displayed as the holding ball image which is further changed, or the holding ball image which is further changed from the speaker 10 is Output a sound effect indicating that it has been displayed.

(When "the second starting opening subtraction command in Fig. 12" is received)
Sub CPU 201 updates (subtracts) the storage area provided in sub RAM 203 based on the reception of the second start opening subtraction command. Thus, the second starting opening holding ball images (second starting opening first holding ball image display area 26k to second starting opening fourth holding ball image displaying area 26n) displayed in the image display device 26 or the second starting opening The reserved number image 26 f is displayed by subtraction. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is executed, along with the subtraction display, the holding ball image which has already been changed is displayed as the holding ball image which is further changed, or the holding ball image which is further changed from the speaker 10 is Output a sound effect indicating that it has been displayed.

(When "demo command in Figure 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a model name or a manufacturer name, which is a display indicating non-playing, and a control to display an immersion prevention image to urge prevention of excessive concentration in the game Control is performed to cause the light emitting device 9 to emit light with the light emission pattern in the demonstration.

(When "design designation command of Fig. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 determines a combination of symbols of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d. For example, when "special symbol A" is designated as a symbol designation command, "777" is determined in order to confirm display of "777" as a combination of symbols of fixed display of decorative symbols. In addition, when “special symbol B” is designated as the symbol designation command, the combination of any of the symbols is determined from the combination of symbols “111”, “333” and “555”. Moreover, when the "special symbol C" is designated, the combination of one of the symbols is determined from the combination of the symbols "222", "444", "666", and "888". Moreover, when "special symbol D" is designated, "765" etc. are determined, for example. In addition, it is similarly determined about "special symbol E", "special symbol F", and "special symbol G". Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming state after the winning game is the "probable changing gaming state" from the combination of the decorative symbols, but not limited to this, "special symbol B", "special symbol C" When is specified, one of the symbol combinations is determined from the symbol combination of “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”, “666” and “888”, When a combination of decorative symbols is displayed, it does not know whether the gaming state after the hit game is the “probable change gaming state”, and during the hitting game or the ending of the hitting game, the playing state after the hit game It may be notified whether or not the "probable variation gaming state".

  In addition, sub CPU 201, in the sub RAM 203, from the transition to the "probable variation gaming state" once, until the transition to the "normal gaming state", including the pull back of the "time saving gaming state", designated symbol of the hit By receiving the command, it counts and stores the number of times the game has shifted to the winning game in succession. That is, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a counter for the number of consecutive hits, and the counter is added when the game shifts to the hit game in the "probable change gaming state" and when it shifts to the hit game in the "time saving game state" It is cleared when it shifts to the "normal game state". As a result, on the effect control board 200 side, it is possible to count and store the number of times the game has been shifted to the winning game continuously. In addition, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a counter for the number of consecutive 10 rounds separately from the above counter, and the sub CPU 201 receives a symbol designation command indicating one of "special symbols A, C, E, F" Then, the counter for the number of consecutive 10 rounds is added, and it is cleared when it is shifted to the "normal game state" or when the symbol designation command indicating "special symbol B" is received. As a result, on the effect control board 200 side, it is possible to count and store the number of times of shifting to the game per 10 rounds in succession.

(When the "special symbol variation pattern specification command in Figure 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 determines the effect pattern variation pattern. Here, "representation symbol variation pattern" is configured as shown in FIG. 18, and for example, when a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is received, "simulated ream 3 super reach" In order to determine the content of "pseudo ream" in "", the content of "super reach", the notice effect to be executed, etc., one of them is determined from "production symbol fluctuation pattern 19" to "production symbol fluctuation pattern 21". . That is, in the special symbol variation pattern designation command, a large frame (a variation time or the like) of "pseudo ream 3 super reach" is determined, and more detailed effect contents are determined in the effect symbol variation pattern. In addition, as for "the production design fluctuation pattern", as shown in Figure 18, one production design fluctuation pattern was decided vis-a-vis the fluctuation pattern of 1 (the special design fluctuation pattern) (for example, "the fluctuation pattern 1" And "render symbol variation pattern 1"), or for one variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern), two or more rendition symbol variation patterns are determined (for example, "variation pattern 2" and "render symbol variation" There is a pattern 2 "and a" effect pattern variation pattern 3 "). Thus, the number of special symbol variation patterns stored in main ROM 102 can be reduced, which can contribute to the reduction of the capacity of main control board 100, and even if the number of special symbol variation patterns is reduced, among a plurality of effect symbol variation patterns. Since it is possible to determine one of the effect pattern variation patterns, it is possible to enrich the effects for one special symbol variation pattern. The effect symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 18 is stored in the sub ROM 202.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 19, the presence or absence of execution of advance notice effects is determined in each effect symbol fluctuation pattern. FIG. 19 shows an executable notice "O" and an impossible notice "X" for each effect pattern change pattern. For example, "effect pattern change pattern 2" is "mini character advance notice". And, "reproduction button advance notice" and "pre-reading advance notice" can be executed, and other notices can not be executed. In addition, in FIG. 19, although described as feasible and impracticable, when the effect pattern variation pattern is determined, the advance notice effect may be uniquely determined. For example, when "reproduction symbol variation pattern 2" is determined, "mini character preview", "reproduction button preview", and "prefetch preview" may be executed. Further, as another method, when the effect pattern variation pattern is determined, it is possible to perform execution lottery of whether or not to execute in the feasible notice, and to execute only the winning notice effect. For example, when "reproduction pattern variation pattern 2" is determined, the execution lottery is performed for "mini character preview", "production button preview", and "pre-reading preview", among which "production button preview" If only the execution lottery is held, it is sufficient to execute only the "promotion button advance notice".

  The outline of each preliminary announcement effect shown in FIG. 19 is as follows. "Mini character advance notice" is an advance notice made before the formation of reach, and it is announced that the game will be developed into reach and the hit game will be given depending on the number and type of mini characters displayed on the image display device 26. It is an effect that "Effective button advance notice" is an advance notice to be made before the formation of reach, and makes it possible to depress the effect button 14, and displays an image prompting the depression of the effect button 14 on the image display device 26, If 14 is pressed, for example, a character image and a serif announcement in which the character image concerned is said to be a speech are executed, and depending on the type of the character image and the type of the speech, it may be developed to reach or a hit game may be given. It is an effect to give notice. The "presentation lever advance notice" is an advance notice performed at the timing of deriving the result of the reach contents before the formation of the reach and the reach, and is the production having a higher degree of expectation for the hit game than the "effect button advance notice" described above. . For example, if "render lever advance notice" is executed at the timing when "production button advance notice" before the formation of reach is executed, the expectation for the hit game becomes high. Further, at the timing of deriving the result of the effect content of the reach, the effect lever 15 can be operated, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 15 is displayed on the image display device 26, and the effect lever 15 is operated. For example, the movable body 28 is moved to notify that the effect content of the reach is success (hit), and when the movable body 28 is not moved, it notifies that the effect content of the reach is failure (loss). Such an effect is also feasible. The "pattern action notice" is a notice performed at the start of the change, and the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c simultaneously start changing or individually start changing. It is an effect that predicts that the game will be developed to reach or that a hit game will be awarded. In addition, “design action advance notice” is also an effect that suggests a set value (described in detail in FIG. 20). "Specific sound advance notice" is a notice given at the time of temporary suspension of fluctuation, and an effect emitted from the speaker 10 when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c temporarily stop. Depending on the type of sound, this is an effect that suggests that the pseudo-series may continue in the pseudo-series advance notice described later, or that the game may be included in the suspension of the subsequent “symbol variation game” in the pre-read effect described later. In addition, “specific sound advance notice” is also an effect that suggests a setting value (described in detail in FIG. 20). "Movable body advance notice" is an advance notice made at the time of start of fluctuation or during the production of reach, and is a production that gives notice of the development of reach or the award of a hit game depending on the operation mode of the movable body 28 It is. In addition, “previous movable body announcement” is also an effect that suggests a set value (described in detail in FIG. 20). "Group notice" is positioned as a notice that can be expected to have the most hit game compared to other notices, and is more likely to be selected as it is determined to be a "hit" in the special symbol hitting determination process, and "losing" It is an effect that is less likely to be selected as it is determined that For example, when a reach is formed, a character group image composed of a plurality of characters appears from the right end of the image display device 26 and an image such as moving to the left end of the image display device 26 is displayed. In addition, since the probability of hitting is different for each setting value, for example, “group notice” is more likely to appear in the case of the setting value “1” than in the case of the setting value “4”. In this way, it is possible to impart an interest of being able to estimate the set value from the appearance degree of the "group advance notice". In addition, about "pre-reading advance notice", in order to explain by the part of "pre-reading effect" later, explanation here is omitted. Further, the "special notice during change" is a notice that can be executed in the "probable variation gaming state" or the "time-saving gaming state" and is not executable in the "normal gaming state". The "change advance / dedicated advance notice" is a notice given at the start of a change, and is an effect for giving a notice of developing a reach and that a hit game is given. The "special notice during variation" is referred to as "specific notice effect" in the flowchart described later.

(When "the symbol stop command of Fig. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 stops the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d which are fluctuating in the image display device 26. Further, with the stop of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d, control is performed to output a stop sound of the decorative symbol from the speaker 10. In addition, when the below-mentioned chance eye continuous notice is performed, the control which displays the output of the stop sound corresponding to chance eye continuous notice, and an effect image is performed. Further, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 by receiving the symbol stop command. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 200, it is possible to count the number of times of variation in the "symbol variation game". The value of the variation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 is cleared by receiving a symbol designation command of a special symbol (special symbol A, B, C, E, F) of the winning. However, when counting the total number of changes, it is assumed that the number of changes is calculated in an area that is not separately cleared.

(When "playing state command (normal) in Fig. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the normal gaming state, and an image corresponding to the normal gaming state for the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c. For example, control is performed to make an image in which a character image is added to a numeric image, and control to output sound effects corresponding to a background image in a normal gaming state from the speaker 10.

(When "the opening command in Fig. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display the opening image of the winning game (for example, an image in which the main characters are gathered), and the sound effect corresponding to the opening (sound effect such as "big hit") 10 Control is performed to control the light emitting device 9 with more emission control and a light emission pattern (light emission in rainbow color) corresponding to the opening. By these effects, it is possible to enhance the mood of the player who is playing a hit from now on.

(When "the round command in Fig. 14" is received)
When the sub CPU 201 receives the first round command after the reception of the opening command, the sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display an image such as “round 1”, a character image to appear in the first round, etc. Control for outputting a sound effect corresponding to the above from the speaker 10 and control for causing the light emitting device 9 to emit light with a light emission pattern corresponding to the first round. The sub CPU 201 recognizes the second and third rounds (counted by the sub CPU 201) every time it receives a round command thereafter, and executes effects according to each round.

(When the "Inter-round interval command in Fig. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a character image or the like corresponding to the inter-round interval, control to output a sound effect corresponding to the inter-round interval from the speaker 10, and a light emission pattern corresponding to the inter-round interval The light emitting device 9 is controlled to emit light.

(When "ending command in Fig. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display an ending image (for example, a main character image) of the winning game, controls to output a sound effect corresponding to the ending from the speaker 10, and a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending. The light emitting device 9 is controlled to emit light.

(When "playing state command (probable change) in Fig. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the probability variation gaming state, and an image corresponding to the probability variation gaming state for the left decoration symbol image 26a, the middle decoration symbol image 26b, and the right decoration symbol image 26c For example, control is performed to output only sound images from the speaker 10 corresponding to the background image in the probability variation gaming state, or control to make only the number image).

(When "playing state command (time saving) in Fig. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the short game state, and an image corresponding to the short time game state for the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c. For example, control is performed to output only sound images from the speaker 10 corresponding to the background image of the time saving game state, or control to make only the number image).

  Next, an effect example using the image display device 26 and the like will be described. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, it is a matter of course that the following effects may be provided, and the gaming state to be executed is also "normal gaming state", "time saving gaming state", " All of the probability variation gaming states may be targeted, two may be targeted, or any one may be targeted.

(Pre-reading effect)
With pre-reading effect, prior decision processing is done prior to the hit decision processing in special symbol fluctuation start processing at the timing where the game ball enters the 1st starting opening 21 or the 2nd starting opening 22 decision of the prior determination processing It is an effect to be executed based on the result. When no pre-reading effect is loaded, for example, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21, after acquiring and storing the determination information (random number value) in FIG. 10, the special symbol variation start of FIG. 12 is started. Since special symbol winning determination processing is performed in the time processing, even if the determination information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth storage area", it is until the determination information (random number value) is moved to the "corresponding storage area". Whether it is a hit or not is not determined. Therefore, even if the judgment information (random number value) of "hit" is acquired, the expectation for the hit is enhanced at a stage before the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "relevant storage area". It is not possible to carry out rendition etc. However, if pre-reading effect is loaded, for example, in the processing after acquiring and storing the determination information (random number value) in FIG. 10, “pre-determination processing” is performed to determine “hit” or “loss”. Since it is possible to execute an effect continuously over a plurality of changes (including the change transferred to the storage area) until the determination information (random number value) is transferred to the "storage area", the "storage area" Thus, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation to “hit” from the stage before the determination information (random number value) is transferred to.

  As a specific example of the pre-reading effect, "pending pre-reading effect" is mentioned. With "preserving presentation effect", mainly, 1st starting opening 1st holding ball image display area 26g-1st starting opening 4th holding ball image display area 26j or 2nd starting opening 1st holding ball image display area 26k- It is an effect using a holding ball image displayed in the second starting opening fourth holding ball image display area 26 n. For example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (randomness in the "fourth storage area" After storing the numerical value), the predetermination process is performed. And when it is judged based on the judgment result of the prior judgment processing that holding pre-reading effect is performed, a pre-reading holding ball image different from the normal holding image is displayed in the first start opening fourth holding ball image display area 26j. Do. As the prefetch holding ball image, for example, it is possible to display a plurality of types or multiple levels such as “flashing white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, “rainbow”, etc. When the determination result is "Cut", any of "flashing white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold" and "rainbow" can be displayed, and the determination result of the prior determination process is In the case of "missing", one of "white blinking", "blue", "green", "red" and "gold" can be displayed. Then, "rainbow" can be selected only in the case of "hit", and in the case of "hit", "red" or "gold" can be easily selected, and in the case of "loss", "white blinks" “Blue” and “Blue” are easy to select, and the expectations for “Red” and “Gold” are raised. In addition, at the time of entering the ball, it is "flashing in white", but whenever "1 game of variation" is played, it changes to a holding ball image with high expectation of hitting, such as "blue" and "green". It is also possible to display "gold" from the time of entering the ball.

  Moreover, "zone effect" is mentioned as a specific example of another effect of the said pre-reading effect. The “zone effect” is an effect mainly using the image display device 26. For example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (randomness in the "fourth storage area" After storing the numerical value), the predetermination process is performed. Then, if it is determined that the zone effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the prior determination process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, in the image display device 26, "If the special symbols are aligned, ゾ ー ン zone rush!" And, etc., after performing the effect to plunge, align the special symbols, and let plunge into the "○○ zone", and the judgment information (random number value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" is "the relevant storage area" Perform the "○○ zone" effect until the fluctuation transferred to During the execution of the “OO zone” effect, the image display device 26 displays a telop such as “in the ○ zone” or the like. Then, "zone effect" is easy to be executed when it is determined to be "hit" in the predetermination process, and is difficult to be executed when it is determined to be "loss", so that it is executed when it is executed. It can be highly hoped that a game will be awarded.

  In addition, as a specific example of another effect of the above-mentioned pre-reading effect, “chance eye continuous notice” may be mentioned. "Chance first-shot advance notice" is an effect using the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c mainly displayed on the image display device 26. For example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (randomness in the "fourth storage area" After storing the numerical value), the predetermination process is performed. Then, when it is determined that the chance continuous effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the prior determination process, for example, the “symbol variation game corresponding to the determination information (random number value) stored in the“ first storage area ” Determination display of the “symbol change game” corresponding to the determination information (random number value) stored in the “second storage area”, and the determination information (random number value stored in the “third storage area” In the finalized display of the "symbol variation game" corresponding to), the combination of the decorative symbol images of the same color is stopped. For example, in the decorative symbol image, "333" and "777" are configured in red, "111" and "555" are configured in green, and "222" and "444". , “666” and “888” are blue, and combinations of only red such as “337” and “773”, combinations of only green such as “115” and “551”, and “246 The finalized combination display of only blue color such as “628” or “628” is displayed over a plurality of changes, which has an effect of giving an expectation that a winning will be given in the subsequent “symbol variation game”. In the case of "Cut", it is easy to select the combination in red only, and in the case of "losing", it is easy to select the combination in blue only and the combination of only red is finalized and displayed. I'm raising expectations for the hit.

(Simulation series notice)
The pseudo linked notice is an effect using the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the pseudo linked special symbol mainly displayed on the image display device 26, and “1 fluctuation In the game of “,” the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is repeatedly performed to make it appear as if a plurality of changes have been made. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the pseudo ream can be executed “2” times, “3” times, “4” times, and the degree of expectation to “hit” increases as the number of times increases. (In the present embodiment, “4” times are determined as “hit”). As a specific effect content, for example, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative symbol image 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, and "the pseudo symbol is displayed as the middle decorative symbol image 26b. A temporary stop symbol (for example, "NEXT") is displayed temporarily, and all the decorative symbol images are displayed again in a variable manner (at this point, pseudo-continuous "2" times), and again as the left decorative symbol image 26a "5" is temporarily displayed, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, and "pseudo series dedicated symbol (for example," NEXT ")" is temporarily displayed as the middle decorative symbol image 26b. Again, all the decorative symbol images are variably displayed (at this point, pseudo run "3" times. Thereafter, pseudo run "4" times are the same), and so on. For example, "2" In the first temporary stop display, the left decorative symbol image When “5” is temporarily displayed as 6a and “5” is displayed temporarily as the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo run “2” times is performed, and the left decorative symbol is displayed in the “2” first temporary display. When "5" is temporarily displayed as the image 26a and "6" is displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo run "3" is performed (hereinafter, the pseudo run "4" is the same) . In addition, after reaching a reach, so-called "after reach reach pseudo run" or, for example, the "1st time", for example, temporary stop display of "pseudo run special purpose symbol (for example," NEXT ")" as a middle decoration design image 26b At the start of fluctuation after the temporary stop display of, notice that the temporary stop special display of "pseudo-run dedicated symbol (for example," NEXT ")" is displayed in the middle decoration symbol image 26b (symbol stop advance notice), It is also possible to perform such an effect that the pseudo ream “3” times or more is determined.

(RTC production)
The RTC effect is an effect mainly using the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. For example, a real time clock (RTC) device 204 for outputting date information and time information is provided to the effect control board 200 so that the date information and time information can be recognized in the effect control board 200. When a predetermined date comes, it is an effect that enables the effect stored in advance in the sub ROM 202 to be selectable, or performs an exclusive effect at a predetermined time. As the exclusive effect, for example, the image display device 26 displays "OO time" or the like, and the speaker 10 outputs the music corresponding to "OO time". Then, on the image display device 26, a message such as "Confirmed if 予 告 notice is given" is displayed. That is, when it is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hitting determination process" when performing special effects, if it is determined that "○ ○ advance notice" is selected with high probability, and it is determined that the loss, By not selecting “○○ advance notice”, it is possible to produce an effect such that “○ advance notice” appears and the hit is decided while the dedicated effect is being executed.

  Next, about the effect mode “setting suggestion effect” (suggestion effect suggesting setting value) suggesting the above-mentioned “setting value” set on the main control board 100 side to the player on the effect control board 200 side I will explain. Note that “suggested” means, for example, in the present embodiment, one that suggests that the set value is “2” or more (that is, the set value “1” or the set value “2”), and the set value is set high. A value (that is, a setting value "1") is suggested, a setting value is an odd number (that is, a setting value "1" or a setting value "3"), a setting value is even That is, it includes both a definite suggestion and a non-deterministic (fuzzy) indication such as a set value “2” or a set value “4”). Further, the term "determinate suggestion" does not directly indicate, for example, the set value "1" or the like, but indirectly implies through a character image or the like. Therefore, displaying the character image displayed only in the case of the setting value “1” corresponds to performing a definite indication that the setting value is “1”.

  In addition, “setting suggestion effect”, for example, as “previous notice effect” shown in FIG. 20 described later, combines the suggestion of the degree of expectation to the winning game and the suggestion of the setting value (that is, setting) In addition to the indication of the set value set by the operation means, there is an indication of the possibility that the special gaming state will be performed), or, for example, dedicated only for the suggestion of the set value shown in FIG. For example, a dedicated background image for only suggesting a setting value, as shown in FIG. 33 described later, corresponds to the character image of FIG. As in "preliminary effects", if you also use the suggestion of the degree of expectation to the hit game and the suggestion of the set value, for example, you can expect the hit game and expect the high set value, and you can not expect the hit game Can be rich in variations, such as those that can expect a high set value, and those that can expect a hit game but not a high set value, and make it pay more attention to what kind of preview effects appear be able to. Also, if it is dedicated, it can be made to appear separately from the advance notice effect, so it is possible to further concentrate on the game.

  First, as shown in FIG. 17, the presence / absence of execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined for each variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern). The part shown by "(circle)" by execution presence or absence of setting suggestion rendering has shown that it can be performed, and the part shown by "x" has shown that it can not be performed. That is, as described above, the "all rotation reach" of the "variation pattern 11" is the most desired reach for the player to play a game, and the appearance degree is also low. When "rotation reach" occurs, I want to concentrate on the effects that can not be seen rarely. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion effect is performed in such "all rotation reach", it becomes rather annoying, and therefore, it is considered impossible. Further, the “shortened fluctuation” of the “variation pattern 12” has a short fluctuation time itself of “2S”, and it is highly possible that the player misses even if the setting suggestion effect is performed during this “2S”. For these reasons, in the "variation pattern 11" and the "variation pattern 12", the execution of the setting suggestion effect is disabled. As described above, making the setting suggestion effect infeasible in accordance with the contents of the variation pattern or the variation time makes it possible to give the troublesomeness as described above, and miss the setting suggestion effect as described above. Can be prevented. In addition, even if it hits by the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect mentioned later, in the case of the "variation pattern 11" in the case of the "variation pattern 11" or the "variation pattern 12", the determined fluctuation pattern is the whole rotation reach The execution is carried over to a later hit game, and in the case of the “variation pattern 12”, the execution is carried over after the next fluctuation. As described above, in the case where the “shortening fluctuation” (2S) is provided in the normal gaming state, the setting suggestion effect may not be executable even in the “shortening fluctuation” (2S) in the normal gaming state.

  Next, the relationship between the advance presentation effect and the setting indication effect will be described using FIG. As described above, “pattern action advance notice” and “movable body advance notice” also play a role as setting suggestion effect in addition to developing the reach and noticing that the hit game is given. There is. In addition to the role of suggesting that the pseudo-series is continued or the possibility that a game is included in the subsequent suspension, the “specific sound advance notice” also plays a role as a setting suggestion effect. In addition, with regard to the above-mentioned advance notice (hold change advance notice), in addition to the role of giving notice of the fact that the game is developed to reach and the winning game is given, it plays a role as setting suggestion effect.

(Pattern action notice)
"A symbol action notice" in FIG. 20A is a notice effect of the contents described above, and has "pattern 1" to "pattern 8", and for example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". The expectation for the game is different for each pattern, such as the person who is executed has a high expectation for the game (the higher the number, the higher the expectation for the game is for the sake of convenience. You may change it as appropriate). Furthermore, a portion indicated by “o” indicates that the execution is possible, and a portion indicated by “x” indicates that the execution is impossible. Further, set values “1” to “4” indicate set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the setting value “1” is set, “pattern 1” to “pattern 5”, “pattern 7”, and “pattern 8” can be executed, and “pattern 6” can not be executed. When the set value "2" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 6" and "pattern 8" can be executed, and "pattern 7" can not be executed. When the setting value "3" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 5" and "pattern 7" can be executed, and "pattern 6" and "pattern 8" can not be executed. When the set value "4" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 6" can be executed, and "pattern 7" and "pattern 8" can not be executed. Thereby, when "pattern 6" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set, and the "pattern 6" of the symbol action notice is From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is "2" or the setting value is "4". Similarly, when “pattern 7” is executed, it means that the set value “1” is set or the set value “3” is set, and “pattern 7” of the symbol action notice is The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “3”. Similarly, when “pattern 8” is executed, it means that the set value “1” is set or the set value “2” is set, and “pattern 8” of the symbol action notice is The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". As described above, since the symbol action notice plays a role of suggesting a set value in addition to the role as the original notice, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which symbol action notice is executed Can be improved. In addition, "pattern action advance notice" may have not only the pattern listed in FIG. 20 (A) but also other patterns.

(Specific sound notice)
"Specific sound advance notice" in FIG. 20 (B) is the advance notice effect of the contents described above, and has "pattern 1" to "pattern 5", for example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". Each pattern has different expectations for winning a game, such as being more likely to be continued, and having a high probability of a hit being included in a subsequent hold. The higher the number, the higher the chance of winning a game, but you may change it as appropriate). Furthermore, a portion indicated by “o” indicates that the execution is possible, and a portion indicated by “x” indicates that the execution is impossible. Further, set values “1” to “4” indicate set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value “1” is set, “pattern 1”, “pattern 2”, “pattern 4”, and “pattern 5” can be executed, and “pattern 3” can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 3" and "pattern 5" can be executed, and "pattern 4" can not be executed. When the setting value "3" is set, "pattern 1", "pattern 2" and "pattern 4" can be executed, and "pattern 3" and "pattern 5" can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "4" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 3" can be executed, and "pattern 4" and "pattern 5" can not be executed. Thereby, when "pattern 3" is executed, it means that the setting value "2" is set or the setting value "4" is set, and "pattern 3" of the specific sound notice is From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is "2" or the setting value is "4". Similarly, when “pattern 4” is executed, it means that the setting value “1” is set or the setting value “3” is set, and “pattern 4” of the specific sound notice is The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “3”. Similarly, when “pattern 5” is executed, it means that the setting value “1” is set or the setting value “2” is set, and “pattern 5” of the specific sound notice is The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". As described above, since the specific sound advance notice plays a role of suggesting the set value in addition to the role as the original advance notice, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which specific sound advance notice is executed Can be improved. In addition, the "specific sound advance notice" is not limited to the patterns listed in FIG. 20B, but may have other patterns.

(Movable body notice)
"Movable body advance notice" in FIG. 20C is the advance notice effect of the contents described above, and has "pattern 1" to "pattern 5", and for example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". The expectation for the game is different for each pattern, such as the person who is executed has a high expectation for the game (the higher the number, the higher the expectation for the game is for the sake of convenience. You may change it as appropriate). Furthermore, a portion indicated by “o” indicates that the execution is possible, and a portion indicated by “x” indicates that the execution is impossible. Further, set values “1” to “4” indicate set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value “1” is set, “pattern 1”, “pattern 2”, “pattern 4”, and “pattern 5” can be executed, and “pattern 3” can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 3" and "pattern 5" can be executed, and "pattern 4" can not be executed. When the setting value "3" is set, "pattern 1", "pattern 2" and "pattern 4" can be executed, and "pattern 3" and "pattern 5" can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "4" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 3" can be executed, and "pattern 4" and "pattern 5" can not be executed. As a result, when "pattern 3" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is "2" or the setting value is "4". Similarly, when “pattern 4” is executed, it means that the set value “1” is set or the set value “3” is set. The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “3”. Similarly, when “pattern 5” is executed, it means that the set value “1” is set or the set value “2” is set. The execution can indicate to the player that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". As described above, since the movable body advance notice also plays a role of suggesting the setting value in addition to the role as the original advance notice, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which movable advance notice is executed, and the game is entertaining Can be improved. In addition, "a movable body advance notice" may have not only the pattern mentioned to FIG. 20 (C) but another pattern. For example, a plurality of patterns in which the movement speed of the movable body is different may be provided, and a notice effect or a setting suggestion effect may be performed by those patterns.

(Pre-reading notice _ hold change notice)
"Pre-reading advance notice (hold change advance notice)" in FIG. 20D is the advance notice effect of the contents described above, and includes "pattern 1" to "pattern 9", for example, "preceding than" pattern 1 " The expectation for the game is different for each pattern, such that the pattern 2 "is executed with a higher expectation for the game (the higher the number, the higher the expectation for the game is for the sake of convenience. But you may change it as appropriate). Furthermore, a portion indicated by “o” indicates that the execution is possible, and a portion indicated by “x” indicates that the execution is impossible. Further, set values “1” to “4” indicate set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value “1” is set, “pattern 1” to “pattern 6”, “pattern 8”, and “pattern 9” can be executed, and “pattern 7” can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 7" and "pattern 9" can be executed, and "pattern 8" can not be executed. When the setting value "3" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 6" and "pattern 8" can be executed, and "pattern 7" and "pattern 9" can not be executed. Further, when the setting value "4" is set, "pattern 1" to "pattern 7" can be executed, and "pattern 8" and "pattern 9" can not be executed. As a result, when "pattern 7" is executed, it means that the setting value "2" is set or the setting value "4" is set, and "pattern of pre-reading notice _ pending change notice" From the execution of 7 ", it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is" 2 "or" 4 ". Similarly, when "pattern 8" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "3" is set, and "pattern of the pre-reading notice_hold change notice" From the execution of 8 ′ ′, it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “3”. Similarly, when “pattern 9” is executed, it means that the set value “1” is set or the set value “2” is set, and “pattern of pre-reading notice _ hold change notice” From the execution of 9 ", it can be suggested to the player that the setting value is" 1 "or the setting value is" 2 ". As described above, since the prefetching advance notice (hold change advance notice) plays a role of suggesting the set value in addition to the role as the original advance notice, the player is notified which preread advance notice (hold change advance notice) is executed. It can be made to pay attention, and the game interest can be improved. The “pre-reading advance notice (hold change advance notice)” is not limited to the patterns listed in FIG. 20D, and may have other patterns.

  Next, the setting suggestion effect related determination table will be described using FIG. The setting suggestion effect related decision table includes (A) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without loss), (B) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss), and (C) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss), (D) A setting indication effect decorative symbol determination table, (E) A setting indication effect serif notice (effect button advance notice) determination table. These tables are stored in the sub ROM 202.

  First, in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without losing) shown in FIG. 21 (A), the vertical axis represents the setting value currently set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis is the setting suggestion effect Is shown. That is, when the setting value “1” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is executed with the probability of “4/256”, With the probability of "1/256", it becomes the execution of the setting indication effect that suggests that the setting value is "1", and with the probability of "251/256", with the setting value "1" or the setting value "3" It does not apply to the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that there is any, and does not apply to the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that it is the setting value “2” or the setting value “4”. In addition, when the setting value “2” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is executed with the probability of “12/256”, With the probability of "244/256", it will be the execution of the setting indication effect that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", and the setting indication effect that indicates that the setting value is "1" There is no case to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests execution or setting value “1” or setting value “3”. In addition, when the setting value “3” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is executed with the probability of “256/256”, Holding the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “2”, and hitting the execution of the setting indication effect that suggests that the setting value is “1”; There is no chance to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “2” or the setting value “4”. In addition, when the setting value "4" is set, the probability of "256/256" corresponds to the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", Holding the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “2”, and hitting the execution of the setting indication effect that suggests that the setting value is “1”; There is no possibility to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”. As described above, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without loss) shown in FIG. 21 (A) is positioned as a table without loss because it is always in charge of execution of any of the setting suggestion effects. Further, in the case of the setting value “1”, the probability of being in the execution of the setting suggestion effect which suggests that the setting value “1” is the most advantageous for the player is the same as the execution of other setting suggestion effects. Since the probability is lower than the probability, it is difficult to perform an effect that definitely suggests a set value, and it is possible to motivate the player to desire to perform an effect that definitely suggests a set value. Further, in the case of the setting value “4”, a setting suggestion effect in the form of the setting value “2” or the setting value “4” is executed while leaving the possibility of the setting value “2” relatively advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by giving a desire to the setting value “2”, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game.

  Although the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with a loss) shown in FIG. 21B is basically the same as the above-mentioned no-loss table, as a result of performing a lottery such as “do not execute”, a loss and It is a table that can be That is, when the setting value “1” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is executed with a probability of “2/256”, With the probability of "1/256", it becomes the execution of the setting indication effect which suggests that the setting value is "1", and with the probability of "24/256", with the setting value "1" or the setting value "3" It will not be executed, with the probability of "229/256", as it is the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that there is. It should be noted that there is no chance to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “2” or the setting value “4”. In addition, when the setting value “2” is set, with the probability of “1/256”, it means that the setting suggestion effect indicating setting value “1” or setting value “2” is executed, With the probability of “24/256”, the setting suggestion effect that indicates that the setting value is “2” or the setting value “4” is executed, and is not performed with the probability of “231/256”. Note that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3” There is no. In addition, when the setting value “3” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is executed with the probability of “24/256”, It will not be executed with the probability of "244/256". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” , And there is no case to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4". In addition, when the setting value “4” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “2” or the setting value “4” is executed with the probability of “12/256”, It will not be executed with the probability of "244/256". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” And the setting suggestion effect which suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”.

  The setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss) shown in FIG. 21 (C) is basically the same as the above-mentioned loss presence table, but the extraction value and the extraction target are different. That is, when the setting value “1” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is executed with a probability of “1/4096”, It does not execute with the probability of "4095/4096". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” , And there is no case to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4". In addition, when the setting value “2” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “2” or the setting value “4” is executed with a probability of “1/4096”, It does not execute with the probability of "4095/4096". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” And the setting suggestion effect which suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”. In addition, when the setting value “3” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is executed with a probability of “1/4096”, It does not execute with the probability of "4095/4096". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” , And there is no case to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4". In addition, when the setting value “4” is set, the setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value “2” or the setting value “4” is executed with the probability of “1/4096”, It does not execute with the probability of "4095/4096". It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value of “2” and the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” And the setting suggestion effect which suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”. Thus, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with a loss) shown in FIG. 21 (C) is, for example, compared with the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with a loss) shown in FIG. 21 (B). It is difficult to win the selection of the execution of the production, and the types of setting suggestion productions to win are also decreasing. Also, as indicated by the setting value “1”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “2” even if the setting value is “1”, or the setting value “1” Since it is arranged not to show a setting suggestion effect which suggests that it is "," it is difficult to obtain useful information for the player. As described above, the reason why there are two types of tables with no loss and tables with a loss is due to the difficulty in establishing the conditions for performing the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect. For example, when a condition that is difficult to establish is satisfied, selecting a table without loss gives a benefit corresponding to the condition that is difficult to be satisfied, and a condition that is easily satisfied is satisfied. Have established a relationship that they can only get the appropriate benefits. The details of the conditions to be satisfied will be described later.

  The decorative design determination table for setting suggestion effects shown in FIG. 21D is used to perform setting suggestive effects using the left stop symbol of the left decorative design image 26a, the middle decorative design image 26b, and the right decorative design image 26c. It is a table to refer to. Similar to the tables described in (A) to (C), the vertical axis indicates the setting value currently set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis indicates the combination of each decorative symbol image to be stopped and the setting suggestion effect It shows the relationship with That is, when the set value "1" is set, the decorative symbol combination "456" indicating that the set value "1" or the set value "2" is stopped with a probability of "1/256". And with the probability of "1/256", stop the decorative symbol combination of "357" that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "3", and do not execute it with the probability of "254/256" There is no need to stop the decorative symbol combination that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the decorative symbol combination of “246” that indicates that the setting value “2” or the setting value “4”. In addition, when the setting value "2" is set, the decorative symbol combination "456" which suggests that the setting value "1" or the setting value "2" is stopped with a probability of "1/256". And with the probability of "1/256", stop the decorative symbol combination of "246" that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", and do not execute it with the probability of "254/256" There is no need to stop the decorative symbol combination that suggests that the setting value is “1” or the decorative symbol combination of “357” that indicates that the setting value “1” or the setting value “3”. In addition, when the setting value "3" is set, the decoration symbol combination "357" is suggested to indicate that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "3" with a probability of "1/256". And with the probability of "255/256", do not execute, and stop the decorative symbol combination of "456" which suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2", or the setting value "1" There is no need to stop the decorative symbol combination that suggests that it is "" or the decorative symbol combination of "246" that indicates that the set value "2" or the set value "4". In addition, when the setting value "4" is set, the decorative symbol combination "246" which suggests that the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is stopped with the probability of "1/256". And with the probability of "255/256", do not execute, and stop the decorative symbol combination of "456" which suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2", or the setting value "1" There is no need to stop the decorative symbol combination that suggests that it is "" or the decorative symbol combination of "357" that indicates that the setting value "1" or the setting value "3". As described above, since the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effects shown in FIG. 21D performs setting suggestive effects by the combination of the stop numbers of the decorative symbols, it is possible to reach when the decorative symbols are stopped. In addition to the original enjoyment as to whether or not the game will be performed, attention can be paid to whether or not the combination of the decoration symbols suggesting the setting is stopped, so that the fun of the game can be improved. In addition, the stop appearance constitutes a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information.

  The setting suggestion effect serif notice (effect button notice) determination table shown in FIG. 21E is used when setting suggestion effect is performed using the serif contents in the "serif notice" derived from the above-mentioned "effect button notice". It is a table to refer to. Similar to the tables described in (A) to (D), the vertical axis indicates the setting value currently set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis indicates the relationship between the serif notification content and the setting suggestion effect. ing. That is, when the set value "1" is set, a serif notice "anyway sticky!" Is suggested with the probability of "1/256", indicating that the set value "1" or the set value "2". And with the probability of "1/256", derive a serif notice "Is it worth sticking?" Which suggests that it is the setting value "1" or the setting value "3", and with the probability of "254/256", Do not execute, and do not derive serif notices that indicate that the setting value is “1” or serif notices that indicate that the setting value is “2” or the set value “4”. . In addition, when the setting value "2" is set, a serif notice "Saying anyway!" Is suggested with the probability of "1/256", indicating that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2". And with the probability of "1/256", derive a serif notice "Maamanakana" that suggests that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", and does not execute it with the probability of "254/256" , And does not derive a serif notice that indicates that the setting value is “1” or a serif notice that indicates that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”? . In addition, when the setting value "3" is set, a serif notice indicating that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "3" with a probability of "1/256" "is it sticky value?" Is derived and is not executed with the probability of "255/256", and a serif notice that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2 anyway" or the setting value is "1" There is no derivation of a serif notice that suggests that there is a serif, nor a serif notice that suggests that the set value is "2" or the set value "4." In addition, when the setting value "4" is set, the probability of "1/256" derives the serif notice "Maamanakana" that suggests that the setting value is "2" or "4". And, with the probability of "255/256", it will not be executed, and it is a serif notice "due anyway!" Which suggests that it is the set value "1" or the set value "2", or that it is the set value "1" There is no need to derive a serif notice that suggests that, or a serif notice that indicates that the set value is “1” or the set value “3”? As described above, since the setting suggestion effect serif notice (effect button notice) determination table shown in FIG. 21E is based on the serif contents in the "serif notice" derived from the "effect button notice", the setting suggestion effect is performed. In addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not to reach reach, and whether or not a hit game is given, it can be expected to have an indication that a setting suggestion effect may be performed. At the time of occurrence of the "preliminary notice", the effect button 14 can be actively operated, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 29, the explanation will be given on the conditions for performing the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect while not changing, the processing performed when the condition is satisfied, the execution mode of the setting indication effect, etc. Do.

  The flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24 are processes performed according to the received command or the like after the main command is received in step S301 of FIG. In addition, “at the time of receiving the first start opening winning command or at the time of receiving the second starting opening winning command” shown in step S303-1-1 constitutes the first condition for executing the execution suggestion of the setting suggestion effect while not changing. Similarly, step S303-1-2 constitutes the second condition, step S303-1-11 constitutes the third condition, and step S303-1-16 constitutes the fourth condition. Step S303-1-21 and step S303-1-22 constitute a fifth condition, step S303-1-21 and step S303-1-27 constitute a sixth condition, and step S303-1 32 constitute the seventh condition, step S303-1-37 constitutes the eighth condition, step S303-1-41 and step S303-1-42 constitute the ninth condition, and -Up S303-1-47 constitutes a tenth condition, step S303-1-52 constitutes an eleventh conditions. That is, when the first to eleventh conditions are satisfied, a determination is made as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, and if the win is given, the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. The conditions are not limited to the first to eleventh conditions, and may include other conditions. For convenience, they are collectively described in the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. For example, the first conditions may be included. The first condition and the second condition may be provided, or all conditions may be provided as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of the conditions may be changed as appropriate. In the flowcharts of FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, although the "extraction" is performed, the setting suggestive effect may be always performed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "extraction".

(Step S303-1-1)
In step S303-1-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to receive the first starting opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether the first starting opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command has been received as the main command. If any of these commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-2. If any command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-11.

(Step S303-1-2)
In step S303-1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a winning in the state where the fourth storage area is stored. Here, in determining whether it is a winning in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, the sub RAM 203 is provided with "the storage area" to "the fourth storage area" as in the main RAM 103, and "symbol" The number of reservations of the variation game may be managed, or the main control substrate 100 transmits to the effect control substrate 200 a “number-of-holds command” each time the storage area is updated, and the command is received. You may manage the number of reservations. Then, if it is a winning in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, the process proceeds to step S303-1-3, and if it is not a winning in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, step S303- Move the processing to 1-7.

(Step S303-1-3)
In step S303-1-3, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-4.

(Step S303-1-4)
In step S303-1-4, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-1-3. For example, if the extracted random number is “0” or “1”, a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or “2” is displayed, and the extracted random number is “2”. For example, if the extracted random number is "3" to "26", it means that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "3". It will not be executed if it is a random number other than that. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-5.

(Step S303-1-5)
In step S303-1-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-4. That is, in the case of the example given in step S303-1-4, it is determined to be a hit if any one of the random numbers "0" to "26" is extracted. Then, when the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-6. When the player does not win, the process proceeds to step S303-1-7.

(Step S303-1-6)
In step S303-1-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. For example, when a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is “1” or a setting value “2”, a setting suggestion effect that indicates that the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is output Set to port. The effect set in the output port is output to each effect device in step S304 in FIG. 16, and the corresponding effect is executed. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (1⁄3 in non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-1-7)
In step S303-1-7, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-8.

(Step S303-1-8)
In step S303-1-8, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-7. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-9.

(Step S303-1-9)
In step S303-1-9, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-8. When the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-1-10. When the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (not changed 1/3) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-10)
In step S303-1-10, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (1⁄3 in non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the first condition during non-shortening is established when the game ball enters the first starting opening 21 or when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 22 and is not short The second condition is the state in which the number of reservations for the “symbol variation game” (for example, the number of reservations corresponding to the first starting port 21) is stored up to the “fourth storage area” (so-called full reservation) In the state (a), the number of holdings of the game ball to the first starting opening 21 or the number of holdings of the “symbol variation game” (for example, the number of holdings corresponding to the second starting opening 22) is the “fourth storage area” It is established by the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 in the state of being stored up to the point (so-called reserved full state). Therefore, in addition to the original enjoyment of entering the game ball into the starting opening and receiving a prize ball or winning lottery, it is possible to impart another enjoyment such as setting suggestion effect may be executed, It is possible to motivate the player to enter the game ball into the starting opening. Also, for example, in the case where one game ball is inserted into the first start opening 21, five game balls are continuously inserted into the first start opening 21 and stored up to the “fourth storage area” It is more difficult to make it in the state (the so-called full hold state). The reason is that if it is determined that the game is "lost" in the "special symbol hitting determination process" in the full reserve state, the fluctuation pattern with reach is hard to be selected and the normal variation is exclusively selected, so the full reserve state is The time is short, and you must let the ball enter within that short time. Then, referring to the table shown in FIG. 21C when the first condition in non-shortening is satisfied, and in the case where the second condition in non-shorting is satisfied in FIG. It was made to refer to the table shown. As described above, the table shown in FIG. 21 (B) is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect than the table shown in FIG. 21 (C). Also, it is possible to give a corresponding privilege when the second non-variable condition which is difficult to establish is satisfied. In addition, since the starting entrance ball in the full state for holding is given only the winning ball, the player has had a strong impression of waste, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be performed By giving the sex, such an impression can be relieved.

  The first condition may be changed as appropriate depending on the position where each starting port is provided. For example, as in the present embodiment, in the case of a board configuration in which gaming balls can enter the second starting opening 22 only at the time of right strike, the first condition is that the gaming balls entered the first starting opening 21 Only in case. On the other hand, as long as the game ball can enter the second starting opening 22 only at the time of right strike, the first condition may be only when the game ball enters the second starting opening 22 (that is, , And may be the condition of satisfaction during the fluctuation). If the game ball can enter the second start opening 22 even when it is left-handed, if the game ball enters the first start opening 21 and if the game ball enters the second start opening 22, the game ball enters the second start opening 22 It may be a ball. In addition, since the game ball can enter the ball in each start hole during the hit game, it may be a condition during non-shortening and during a hit game, or during a non-shortening condition, during a hit game. May be

(Step S303-1-11)
In step S303-1-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning opening winning command has been received. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether the normal winning opening winning command has been received as the main command. Then, when the normal winning a prize opening winning command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-12, and when the normal winning a prize winning command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-16.

(Step S303-1-12)
In step S303-1-12, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-13.

(Step S303-1-13)
In step S303-1-13, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-12. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-14.

(Step S303-1-14)
In step S303-1-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-13. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-1-15. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 1/3) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-15)
In step S303-1-15, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the extraction in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (1⁄3 in non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the third condition in the non-variable condition is satisfied when the gaming ball enters the normal winning opening 23. Originally, entering the game ball into the normal winning opening 23 was not interesting for the player because only the winning ball is given, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed By granting the possibility, it is possible to make the game ball enter the ordinary winning opening 23 with interest. It should be noted that since the game ball can enter the normal winning opening 23 even during the change or short hit or during the hit game, when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 23, the non-short change and during the short It may be a condition during a hit game, or it may be a condition during non-change, during a change, or during a hit, either.

(Step S303-1-16)
In step S303-1-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is time to receive a demo command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether a demo command has been received as a main command. If the demo command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-17. If the demo command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-1-21.

(Step S303-1-17)
In step S303-1-17, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-18.

(Step S303-1-18)
In step S303-1-18, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-17. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-19.

(Step S303-1-19)
In step S303-1-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-18. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-1-20. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 1/3) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-20)
In step S303-1-20, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (1⁄3 in non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  Thus, the fourth condition in the non-variable condition is satisfied when a demo command is received and, for example, a demo screen is displayed. Originally, the demonstration screen was not interesting for the player, but as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make the demonstration screen display interesting by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed. Can. It should be noted that the fourth condition in non-shortening can be easily established if you stop hitting the game ball and wait for a predetermined time, so if it is easy to put out the setting suggestion effect, you repeatedly make the setting suggestion effect run As a result, when it is determined that a high set value can not be expected, playing a game may be avoided, which may lead to a decrease in operation. Then, by referring to the table shown in FIG. 21C, occurrence of such inconvenience can be prevented by making the setting suggestion effect not easily appear. In addition, since the display of the demo screen may also occur during variation, the case where the demo screen is displayed may be considered as a condition during non-shortening and during medium-shortening, or during non-shortening, during middle It may be one of the conditions.

(Step S303-1-21)
In step S303-1-21, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 revolutions) has elapsed. That is, with reference to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above, it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 revolutions) has elapsed while not changing. Then, if a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 revolutions) has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-22. If a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 revolutions) has not elapsed, step S303-1-32. Transfer the process to

(Step S303-1-22)
In step S303-1-22, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of the fluctuation is N times (for example, 10 times). Here, the specific effect at the start of variation may be, for example, "mini character preview" shown in FIG. 19 or "symbol action preview". That is, assuming that "mini character advance notice" is a specific effect, when the sub CPU 201 executes "mini character advance notice", it counts the number of "mini character advance notice" occurrences in the sub RAM 203 and each time a predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 revolutions) elapses. Then, it is determined whether "mini character preview" has occurred N times (for example, 10 times). In addition, the count value of the number of occurrences of the "mini character advance notice" is cleared every 100 revolutions or when it is shifted to a hit game. Then, if the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of the change is N (for example, 10), the process proceeds to step S303-1-23, and the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of the change is N ( For example, if it is not ten times), the process proceeds to step S303-1-27.

(Step S303-1-23)
In step S303-1-23, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-24.

(Step S303-1-24)
In step S303-1-24, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-23. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-25.

(Step S303-1-25)
In step S303-1-25, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-24. When the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-26. When the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 2/3) is finished, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-26)
In step S303-1-26, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (2/3 in non-shortening) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the fifth condition in the non-variable condition is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of the change within the predetermined change number is N times. Therefore, it can be made to pay attention also to how much a specific rendition has occurred, and it is possible to give an interest for each fluctuation and rendition. In addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not to reach a reach, and whether or not a hit game is awarded if the advance notice is adopted as the specific effect, the number of occurrences within the predetermined fluctuation number is N. In this case, since the setting suggestion effect may be performed, it is possible to suppress discouragement even if it does not develop to reach or loses. In addition, replacing "mini character preview" with "variation in special short notice" shown in FIG. In the case of N times, the condition may be satisfied.

(Step S303-1-27)
In step S303-1-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the time of fluctuation stop is N times (for example, 10 times). Here, the specific effect at the time of the fluctuation stop may be, for example, “specific sound advance notice” shown in FIG. 19 or other notices not shown in FIG. That is, assuming that "specific sound advance notice" is the specific effect, when the sub CPU 201 executes "specific sound advance notice", the sub RAM 203 counts the number of occurrences of "specific sound advance notice", and the predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations) Each time it passes, it is determined whether "specific sound advance notice" has occurred N times (for example, ten times). In addition, the count value of the "specific sound advance notice" occurrence frequency is cleared every 100 revolutions, or when it is shifted to a hit game. Then, when the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the time of the variation stop is N times (for example, 10 times), the process proceeds to step S303-1-28, and the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the time of the variation stop is N ( For example, if it is not ten times), the processing by each gaming state (2/3 of the non-changeable middle) ends, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-1-28)
In step S303-1-28, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-29.

(Step S303-1-29)
In step S303-1-29, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-1-28. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-30.

(Step S303-1-30)
In step S303-1-30, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-29. When the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-31. When the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 2/3) is finished, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-31)
In step S303-1-31, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (2/3 in non-shortening) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the sixth condition in the non-varying condition is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the time of the variation stop within the predetermined variation number is N times. Therefore, it can be made to pay attention also to how much a specific rendition has occurred, and it is possible to give an interest for each fluctuation and rendition. In addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not to reach a reach, and whether or not a hit game is awarded if the advance notice is adopted as the specific effect, the number of occurrences within the predetermined fluctuation number is N. In this case, since the setting suggestion effect may be performed, it is possible to suppress discouragement even if it does not develop to reach or loses. In addition, replacing "specific sound advance notice" with "time change only notice" shown in FIG. 19, during the change time, the number of occurrences of the specific effect (time change notice only during change stop) within the predetermined fluctuation number The condition may be satisfied when N is N times.

(Step S303-1-32)
In step S303-1-32, the sub CPU 201 determines whether 500 revolutions per unit is not detected. That is, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above, and determines whether 500 rotations have elapsed without being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination processing". Do. Then, if there is no "hit" for 500 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-1-33, and if it does not reach 500 revolutions or after 501 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-1-37.

(Step S303-1-33)
In step S303-1-33, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-.

(Step S303-1-34)
In step S303-1-34, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-33. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-35.

(Step S303-1-35)
In step S303-1-35, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-34. If the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-36. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 2/3) is finished, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-36)
In step S303-1-36, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (2/3 in non-shortening) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the seventh condition in the non-variable condition is satisfied when 500 rotations pass (also referred to as 500 immersive) without being determined as “hit” in the “special symbol hitting determination process”. As described above, the player's sense of loss also increases when the player gets into 500 embarrassing state, but as in the present embodiment, by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed when 500 embarrassing is triggered, I can relieve the sense of loss.

(Step S303-1-37)
In step S303-1-37, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is 1000 rotations. That is, sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the variation counter provided in sub RAM 203 described above, and determines whether or not 1000 rotations have been made without being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination processing". Do. Then, if there is no "hit" for 1000 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-1-38, and if it does not reach 1000 revolutions or after 1001 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-1-41.

(Step S303-1-38)
In step S303-1-38, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-39.

(Step S303-1-39)
In step S303-1-39, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-1-38. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-40.

(Step S303-1-40)
In step S303-1-40, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (2/3 in non-shortening) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the eighth condition during non-shortening is satisfied when 1000 rotations pass (also referred to as 1000 charms) without being determined as “hit” in the “special symbol hitting determination process”. As described above, the player's sense of loss also increases considerably when becoming 1000 addicted, but as in the present embodiment, the sense of loss can be mitigated by providing the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed. be able to. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A with no loss in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is referred to in the state of 1000 curbs, the setting suggestion effect is always executed The player can be given useful information. It is preferable to use the seventh condition and the eighth condition in non-shortening in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be performed without fail in either the 500 immersive state or the 1000 immersive state. Then, in the state of 500 addicts, non-deterministic setting suggestive effects are executed (for example, the setting suggestive effects relating to the set value “1” or the set value “3” are executed), and in the state of 1000 addicts It is also possible to execute a typical setting suggestion effect (for example, performing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value “1”). If configured in this way, the player who sees the setting suggestion effect in the state of being addicted to 500 would like to see a more detailed setting suggestion effect and continue playing the game, so it is possible to improve the operation.

(Step S303-1-41)
In step S303-1-41, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the effect button advance notice is to be executed. That is, as a result of determining the above-described effect symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect button advance notice is to be executed. Then, when the effect button advance notice is executed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-42. When the effect button advance notice is not executed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-47.

(Step S303-1-42)
In step S303-1-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect button 14 has been pressed. That is, in step S302 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the effect button 14 is pressed based on whether or not there is an input from the effect button detection SW 14a. For example, it is determined whether or not the presentation button advance has been executed in one interruption cycle, and the input situation of the presentation button detection SW 14a is confirmed after the next one interruption cycle. Then, when the effect button 14 is pressed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-43, and when the effect button 14 is not pressed, the processing according to each gaming state (3/3 in non-shortening) is performed. After the process, the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Although it has been determined whether or not the effect button 14 has been pressed, the processing is looped until the effect button 14 is operated, and if the effect button 14 is not operated within the operation valid period, step S303. The processing may be shifted to -1-43. That is, even if the presentation button 14 is not operated, a speech preview may appear.

(Step S303-1-43)
In step S303-1-43, the sub CPU 201 reads out from the sub ROM 202 the serif notice (presence button advance notice) determination table for setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 21E, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect serif announcement (effect button announcement) determination table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-44.

(Step S303-1-44)
In step S303-1-44, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect serif announcement (effect button advance notice) determination table read in step S303-1-43. Do. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-45.

(Step S303-1-45)
In step S303-1-45, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the serif announcement for setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-44. If the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-46. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 3/3) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-46)
In step S 303-1-46, the sub CPU 201 sets, as an output port, a dialogue for setting suggestion effect determined by extraction. Then, when the setting suggestion effect serif notice determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in non-shortening) is ended, and the processing shifts to step S304 in FIG. In addition, if the dialogue for setting suggestion effect is set in the output port in the process, the speech notice content that has already been determined along with the determination of the effect pattern variation pattern is rewritten. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution is not performed by the execution lottery of the serif announcement for setting suggestion effect, the serif announcement already determined along with the determination of the rendition pattern variation pattern is executed.

  As described above, the ninth condition in the non-variable condition is satisfied when the effect button 14 is pressed, when the effect button advance notice is selected. Here, like the effect button advance notice, the button operation promoting effect executed before reaching is difficult to be operated as compared with the button operation promoting effect executed after reaching. Because the former includes a mere bustling rendition, and the latter includes only renditions directly connected to the hit without including such rendition, the meaning of performing the button operation in the former is there Because it is not expensive. Under such circumstances, if the effect button 14 is operated in the effect button advance notice, it is possible to give meaning of performing the button operation by giving the possibility of executing the setting suggestion effect. This leads to the solution of the above-mentioned problems such as difficulty in operation. In addition, since the presentation button advance notice may occur during the change, it is possible to set the depression of the presentation action button 14 as a condition during the non-shortening and during the change show when the advance notice button is selected. It may be either a non-shortening condition or a medium-long condition.

(Step S303-1-47)
In step S303-1-47, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the out entry sphere counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above, and determines whether or not the number of out spheres has been detected. Here, the predetermined number is managed in units of 1000, such as 1000, 2000, 3000, etc. When it reaches 1000, it is determined to be the predetermined number, and thereafter it is 2000 When it reaches, similarly, it is determined that it is a predetermined number. Then, if the number of out sphere detection is a predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S303-1-48. If the number of out sphere detection is not a predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S303-1-52.

(Step S303-1-48)
In step S303-1-48, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-49.

(Step S303-1-49)
In step S303-1-49, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-1-48. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-50.

(Step S303-1-50)
In step S303-1-50, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-49. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-1-51. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (not changed 3/3) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-51)
In step S303-1-51, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 during non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the tenth condition in the non-changeable condition is that the game ball does not enter any of the winning openings, and the number of balls entering the out opening 25 does not bring any benefit to the player. It will be established when (for example, 1000 shots) is reached. As described above, when a predetermined number of out-scores are generated, the player's sense of loss also increases, but as in the present embodiment, the possibility of performing the setting suggestion effect triggered by the number of out-spheres is given. Can reduce the sense of loss. It should be noted that since entering the out slot 25 may occur during variation or during a hit or a game, it may be a condition during non variation or during a variation or during a hit game, or during a non variation or during a change. It may be set as either condition during a short game or during a hit game. For example, if the number of balls entered into the out port 25 during the non-shortening changes to the hit game when 950 hits, then the number of balls entered into the out port 25 during the hit game will be 1000 Although it is assumed, in that case, the condition may be satisfied during the hit game, or if the number of balls entered into the out port 25 does not reach 1000 during the hit game, then 1000 during the subsequent change. If the condition is reached, the condition may be met.

(Step S303-1-52)
In step S303-1-52, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the determination time has elapsed. Here, the sub CPU 201 can measure time, for example, triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 21. And if predetermined time passes (for example, when 10 minutes pass), it will judge with judgment time having passed. Then, if the determination time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-53, and if the determination time has not elapsed, the processing for each gaming state (3/3 in non-shortening) is ended, The process proceeds to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-1-53)
In step S303-1-53, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning rate for the first starting opening 21 is equal to or less than a predetermined value. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning rate for the first starting opening 21 within the determination time is equal to or less than a predetermined value. If the winning rate for the first starting opening 21 within the determination time is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S303-1-54, and the winning percentage for the first starting opening 21 within the determination time If it is not equal to or less than the predetermined value, the processing according to each gaming state (3/3 in the non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-1-54)
In step S303-1-54, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-1-55.

(Step S303-1-55)
In step S303-1-55, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-54. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-1-56.

(Step S303-1-56)
In step S303-1-56, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-1-55. When the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-1-57. When the player does not win, the game state-specific process (non-shortening 3/3) is finished, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-1-57)
In step S303-1-57, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 during non-shortening) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, in the eleventh condition during non-shortening, when the winning ratio to the first starting opening 21 within the predetermined time is equal to or less than the predetermined value, ie, the ball does not enter the first starting opening 21 very much In the case, it is established. As described above, if the player does not enter the first start hole 21 too much, the player's sense of loss also increases, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is triggered by the winning ratio to the first start hole 21. The possibility of loss can be mitigated by giving the possibility of being executed. Note that the first start port 21 may be replaced with the second start port 22 to set conditions for variation, or using both the first start aperture 21 and the second start aperture 22 to cause non-variation in middle and variation. It may be a condition of inside. In addition, it is good also as conditions under hitting game.

  FIG. 25 to FIG. 29 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowcharts of FIG. 22 to FIG. First, (A-1) and (A-2) show the case of non-passage, and (B-1) to (B-5) show the cases of hit and tear. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1) of FIG. 25, the “symbol variation game” (in FIG. 25, the left decorative symbol image 26 a, the middle decorative symbol image 26 b, and the right decorative symbol image 26 c fluctuate in FIG. (Showing only the situation shown in the figure), it indicates that "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition has occurred". Here, “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs” refers to the first condition to the third condition, the fifth condition to the eighth condition, which are described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. The tenth condition corresponds to the satisfaction of the eleventh condition. For example, when the "symbol variation game" is being performed, the game ball enters the first starting opening 21, "setting suggestion effect execution lottery conditions occur", and as a result of performing the lottery, it is not a hit For example, as shown in (A-2), no change occurs in the display content displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next “symbol change game”). On the other hand, if it is a win, as shown in (B-2) to (B-5), there is a change in the display content displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next "symbol change game") It occurs. That is, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as shown by (B-2) In the next change (the next “symbol change game”), the “鷹” image ChaA is displayed on the image display device 26. The “鷹” image ChaA is an image that is displayed only when the setting suggestion set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting “1” is met. (In effect, this is an effect that definitely suggests the set value “1”). When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. As shown in (B-3), in the next change (the next “symbol change game”), the “鷲” image ChaB is displayed on the image display device 26. In this “鷲” image ChaB, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is given. It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. As shown in (B-4), in the next change (the next “symbol change game”), the “鴎” image ChaC is displayed on the image display device 26. The “鴎” image ChaC is a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting value “1” or setting value “3” when the setting value set for pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”. It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. As shown in (B-5), the “crow” image ChaD is displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next “symbol change game”). In this "crow" image ChaD, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting value "2" or setting value "4" It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. In addition, a character image (ChaA-ChaD) is an image which suggests setting value exclusively, Comprising: The expectation degree (possibility) to a hit game is not suggested. In addition, the character images (ChaA to ChaD) have been described by way of an example in which the character images (ChaA to ChaD) are displayed during fluctuation in FIG. 25. Of course.

  As described above, when the “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs” and it becomes a win, the character images (ChaA to ChaD) suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed during the change. I did it. In addition, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, ChaA that indicates the setting value definitely is displayed, and the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “2”. In the case of “4”, it is possible to display ChaB to ChaD that suggests the setting value indeterminately, so by the display of ChaA, it is possible to impart an improvement in gaming will and a sense of superiority, and ChaB to ChaD By the display of (1), it is possible to impart the pleasure of making the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 inferred. Note that (A-2) and (B-2) to (B-5) in FIG. 25 represent the time when each decorative symbol image is variably displayed at "high speed (period)", where , "Various display", when each decorative symbol image starts variable display constitutes "low speed (period)", then switches to "medium speed (period)", and further, the above-mentioned "high speed (period)" It changes to the change display of. And then, it switches to "medium speed (period)" again, and further switches to "low speed (period)", and a reach is not formed or a reach is not formed according to the fluctuation pattern, and the decoration of the lost is The combination of the symbol images may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the example of FIG. 29 described later, (A-1) and (B-1) are "medium speed (period)", and (A-2), (B-2), and (A-3). ) Is "high speed (period)". The timing at which the "low speed (period)" switches to "medium speed (period)" constitutes the first timing after the variable information display of the identification information is started, and the "high speed (period)" to "middle" The timing of switching to the fast (period) constitutes the second timing.

  In addition, in FIG. 25, the example which performs a setting suggestion production is described in a fluctuation of the next fluctuation (the following "symbol fluctuation game"), but the timing which performs a setting suggestion production is the next fluctuation (next " It is not limited during the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation game "). For example, the timing shown in FIG. 26 or 27 may be used. (A-1) to (A-4) show the cases of non-compliance, and the cases of (B-1) to (B-4) do not pass (as an example, the set value “1” or the set value “Proposes“ 2 ”), and“ the generation of setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition ”is the same as the example described in FIG. And in the case of non-competition, it temporarily stops with a normal stop sound at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol of the change concerned (refer to Drawing 20). That is, when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are temporarily stopped, a stop sound of "Pessik" is output. On the other hand, in the case of a win, it is configured to stop at the specific stop sound 3 at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol of the change (see FIG. 20). That is, when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c temporarily stop, a stop sound of "Dog" is output. As described above, since the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested also by the stop sound at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol image of the change, any stop sound is accompanied at the time of change stop. It is possible to make them pay attention to the game and to concentrate on the game. In addition, in FIG. 26, although the example which outputs a stop sound each at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol image was mentioned and demonstrated, it does not output stop sound at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol image, but the decision after temporary stop is decided. It may be output at the time of display. The stop sound constitutes a stop mode when the variable display of identification information is stopped.

  Further, FIG. 27 shows the case of non-compliance with (A-1) to (A-3), and the case of compliance with (B-1) to (B-4) (as an example, the set value “1” or The setting value “3” is indicated, and the “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition is generated” is the same as the example described in FIG. Then, in the case of non-matching, each decorative symbol image simultaneously starts changing at the start of the next change (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the variation is started in pattern 7 (see FIG. 20). That is, the right decorative symbol image 26c starts to change first (B-2), the left decorative symbol image 26a starts changing (B-3), and finally the middle decorative symbol image 26b changes. Start (B-4). As described above, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested also by the variation start order of each decorative symbol image at the start of the variation of the next variation (the next "symbol variation game"), It can be made to pay attention also to what variation start order of each decorative symbol image at the start of the variation, and it is possible to concentrate on the game. It should be noted that "at the start of variation" means that when the game ball enters one of the starting openings when the above-mentioned demonstration screen is displayed, the start of the "symbol variation game" whose execution has been suspended It is assumed that the condition is satisfied, and the start of the pseudo-variation in the above-mentioned "pseudo-due preliminary notice" is excluded from the "variation start" at which the setting suggestion effect according to the present embodiment can be performed. That is, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is limited at the start of the pseudo-variation in the "pseudo-series advance notice". As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the "simulated continuous advance notice".

  Next, (A-1) to (A-6) show the cases of non-exclusion, and (B-1) to (B-6) show the cases of admission. Note that the example of FIG. 28 corresponds to the satisfaction of the fourth condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. For example, in (A-1) and (B-1), before fluctuation stop is shown, and in (A-2) and (B-2), fluctuation stop is shown. And in (A-2) and (B-2), it has shown that the number of pending | holding of a "symbol variation game" is "0". And as shown to (A-3) and (B-3), it has shown that the demo command is received and the lottery is performed in connection with it. In (A-3) and (B-3), the demonstration screen is started, and a model name image 26o "○ ○ ○" is displayed. Then, when a predetermined time has passed from (A-3) and (B-3), as shown in (A-4) and (B-4), on the display of the model name image 26o "○ ○ ○" Instead, a manufacturer name image 26 p “○ Co., Ltd.” is displayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined time passes from (A-4) and (B-4), as shown in (A-5) and (B-5), a message image 26 q prompting to play an appropriate game is displayed. ing. And in (A-6) and (B-6), it becomes the display mode shown in (A-2) and (B-2) again, and thereafter, unless the game ball enters any starting opening, (A-3) to (A-5) loop. Here, in the non-competitive case (A-6), the display mode is exactly the same as (A-2), but in the case (B-6) of the clinical case, in addition to the display mode (B-2) Thus, the “鴎” image ChaC, which is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3”, is displayed. When the model name image 26 o is displayed, the manufacturer name image 26 p is displayed, or the message image 26 q prompting to play an appropriate game is displayed, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is performed. It has become an impossible period. As described above, since the setting suggestion effect is performed using the demo screen, as described above, the display of the demo screen can be made interesting. In addition, when displaying the model name image 26o, displaying the maker name image 26p, or displaying the message image 26q prompting to play an appropriate game, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is performed Since the setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing of (B-6) in FIG. 28 which is the non-permission period and the display is finished, the advertisement effect or the advertisement effect by displaying the model name image 26o or the manufacturer name image 26p It is possible to prevent the effect of achieving soundness of the game from being diluted by displaying a message image 26 q prompting to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the demonstration screen, when it becomes winning in the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect, the game ball enters the start opening in any of the starting ports without executing the setting suggestion effect during the demonstration, “design change” The setting indication effect may be executed at any of the start, the change and the stop of the change of the game. In this way, it is possible to effectively prevent the trickful act of trying to obtain only useful information without playing a game. In addition, the demonstration screen (during a demonstration) that enables the execution of setting suggestion effects is excluded from the demonstration screen (during a demonstration) displayed when the power is turned on. That is, on the demonstration screen (during a demonstration) displayed when the power is turned on, the setting suggestion effect can not be executed. In this way, it is possible to effectively prevent the trickful act of trying to obtain only useful information without playing a game when the game arcade is opened.

  Next, (A-1) to (A-3) show the case of non-passage, and (B-1) to (B-5) show the cases of hit of FIG. Note that the example of FIG. 29 corresponds to the satisfaction of the ninth condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. For example, (A-1) and (B-1) indicate that the presentation button advance has occurred, and the image display device 26 displays a presentation button image imitating the presentation button 14. And in either (A-1) or (B-1), it is assumed that the effect button 14 is operated by the player. When the effect button 14 is operated by the player, as shown by (A-2) and (B-2), the character image ChaE is displayed, and a dialogue image “...” Is displayed. Then, in the case of non-competition, as shown in (A-3), the character image ChaE is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a new character image ChaF and a speech image are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from (B-2). For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. As shown in (B-3), the character image "Chaf!" Is issued from the character image ChaF, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". So, when it comes to the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "1" or the setting value "3", as shown in (B-4), the character image ChaF says, "Is there a sticky value?" When a speech image is issued and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" If it becomes, as shown in (B-5) Than character image ChaF, serif image of "Well Well Kana" is issued. In addition, even if it is a case of winning, if the player does not press the effect button 14, the setting suggestion effect shown in (B-3) to (B-5) is not performed, the effect is given by the player. This is more effective because the button 14 is actively operated. Of course, even in the case of winning, the setting suggestion effect shown in (B-3) to (B-5) may be executed even if the effect button 14 is not pressed by the player.

  In addition, in the example of FIGS. 25-27 and FIG. 29, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern with "reach" is determined, the period when "reach" is performed (FIG. 25-FIG. 27, FIG. In the example, not shown) is a period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is limited. That is, when "reach" is formed, the player's attention is gathered whether or not a hit game is provided. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the period in which "reach" is being performed, the player may miss it. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the period in which the "reach" is being executed, the player's attention can be collected as to whether or not the winning game is awarded.

  Next, using FIG. 30 to FIG. 34, the conditions for performing the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect during variation, the processing performed when the condition is satisfied, and the execution mode of the setting indication effect will be described. .

  The flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32 are processes performed in accordance with the received command or the like after the main command is received in step S301 of FIG. In addition, “per 200 revolutions” shown in step S303-2-2 constitutes a first condition for performing setting suggestion effect execution lottery during variation, and thereafter, similarly, step S303-2-8. Constitute the second condition, step S303-2-13 constitutes the third condition, step S303-2-19 constitutes the fourth condition, and step S303-2-24 constitutes the fifth condition. Step S303-2-30 configures the sixth condition, step S303-2-35 configures the seventh condition, step S303-2-42 configures the eighth condition, and S303-2-48 constitutes the ninth condition. That is, when the first to ninth conditions are satisfied, a determination is made as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, and if the win is given, the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. The conditions are not limited to the first to ninth conditions, and other conditions may be included. For convenience, they are collectively described in the flowchart of FIG. 30 to FIG. 32, but for example, the first conditions The first condition and the second condition may be provided, or all conditions may be provided as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of the conditions may be changed as appropriate. Further, in the flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32, although the "extraction" is performed, the setting suggestive effect may be always performed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "extraction".

(Step S303-2-1)
In step S303-2-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the suggestion effect execution completion flag is ON. Here, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a flag storage area for suggestion effect execution completed, and during variation, once the setting suggestion effect is performed, the flag is turned ON, and thereafter, the setting suggestion effect is It is configured not to run. Because during the change, if the probability variation is more likely to hit than the normal gaming state if the probability variation gaming state, if the time-saving gaming state, since the upper limit of 100 revolutions is provided, the period to stay Is shorter than the normal gaming state. If setting suggestion rendering is performed many times in this short period, it becomes rather annoying, or setting suggestion rendering that high setting values can not be expected is frequent, so quitting the game after the termination of the short-lived state and running It is because there is a concern that it will decline. Then, if the suggestion effect execution completion flag is ON, the processing according to each gaming state (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. 16, and if the suggestion effect execution completion flag is ON If not, the process proceeds to step S303-2-2.

(Step S303-2-2)
In step S303-2-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether 200 revolutions per unit is not detected. That is, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the variation counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above, and determines whether or not 200 rotations have elapsed without being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination processing". Do. Then, if there is no "hit" for 200 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-2-3, and if it does not reach 200 revolutions or after 201 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-2-8. In the present embodiment, since the time saving game state is 100 times, the process corresponds to the case where there is no 200 rotations in the "probable change gaming state" during the change.

(Step S303-2-3)
In step S303-2-3, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-4.

(Step S303-2-4)
In step S303-2-4, after the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-3. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-5.

(Step S303-2-5)
In step S303-2-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-4. When the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-2-6. When the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-6)
In step S303-2-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. When the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-7.

(Step S303-2-7)
In step S303-2-7, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the first condition in the variation is that in the "probable change gaming state" in the variation, if 200 revolutions pass without being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination processing" (200 Say) is established. The "probable variation gaming state" is, as described above, easy to be determined as a "hit" by the hit determination of the normal symbol, and the opening and closing mode of the second starting opening 22 when determined to be open and closed in an advantageous opening and closing mode Therefore, basically, you can play a game without reducing the holding balls, but it becomes more difficult to maintain the holding balls as the number of fluctuations increases. Therefore, in the situation of 200 addicts, the ball is often reduced more than the stage of 0 rotation, and it is a situation that is not appreciated for the player. From such a situation, the player's sense of loss also increases, but as in the present embodiment, in the "probable change gaming state" during variation, the setting suggestion effect is executed triggered by the absence of 200 revolutions. The sense of loss can be mitigated by giving the possibility of being

(Step S303-2-8)
In step S303-2-8, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 400 revolutions hit. That is, sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the variation counter provided in sub RAM 203 described above, and determines whether 400 rotation has elapsed without being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination processing". Do. Then, if there is no "hit" for 400 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-2-9, and if it does not reach 400 revolutions or after 401 revolutions, the process proceeds to step S303-2-13. In the present embodiment, since the time saving game state is 100 times, the process corresponds to the case where there is no per 400 rotation in the "probable change gaming state" during the change.

(Step S303-2-9)
In step S303-2-9, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-10.

(Step S303-2-10)
In step S303-2-10, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-9. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-11.

(Step S303-2-11)
In step S303-2-11, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-12.

(Step S303-2-12)
In step S303-2-12, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the second condition in the variation is that in the "probable change gaming state" in the variation, if 400 rotations pass ("Hello") if it is not determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hitting determination process". Say) is established. As described above, the player's sense of loss also increases considerably when the player gets into 400, but the sense of loss can be mitigated by providing the possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be performed as in the present embodiment. be able to. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (A) with no loss in the setting suggestion effect will be referred to when the state becomes 400 embarrassing, the setting suggestion effect is always executed The player can be given useful information. Note that it is preferable to use the first condition and the second condition in combination in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be performed without fail in either the 200 state or the 400 state. Then, in the state of 200 addicts, non-deterministic setting suggestive effects are executed (for example, the setting suggestive effects relating to the set value “1” or the set value “3” are executed), and in the state of 400 addicts It is also possible to execute a typical setting suggestion effect (for example, performing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value “1”). With this configuration, it is possible to mitigate the sense of loss even in a state of 400 embarrassing.

(Step S303-2-13)
In step S303-2-13, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the consecutive hit number counter provided in the sub RAM 203, and determines whether or not the continuous hit number is “5”. If the number of consecutive hits is "5", the process proceeds to step S303-2-14, and if the number of consecutive hits is not "5", the process proceeds to step S303-2-19. .

(Step S303-2-14)
In step S303-2-14, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-15.

(Step S303-2-15)
In step S303-2-15, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-14. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-16.

(Step S303-2-16)
In step S303-2-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-15. When the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-2-17. When the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-17)
In step S303-2-17, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-18.

(Step S303-2-18)
In step S303-2-18, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (1/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the third condition during variation is satisfied when the number of consecutive hits reaches "5" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment due to continuous hit games, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Step S303-2-19)
In step S303-2-19, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the consecutive hit number counter provided in the sub RAM 203, and determines whether the continuous hit number is “10”. Then, if the number of consecutive hits is "10", the process proceeds to step S303-2-20. If the number of consecutive hits is not "10", the process proceeds to step S303-2-24. .

(Step S303-2-20)
In step S303-2-20, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-21.

(Step S303-2-21)
In step S303-2-21, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-20. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-22.

(Step S303-2-22)
In step S303-2-22, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-23.

(Step S303-2-23)
In step S303-2-23, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the fourth condition during variation is satisfied when the number of consecutive hits reaches “10”. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment due to continuous hit games, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, when the number of consecutive hits reaches “10” times, the setting suggestion effect is performed, and the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. By the effect being executed, it is possible to provide the player with useful information. Note that it is preferable that the third condition and the fourth condition in the variation be adopted in combination. In this case, even if the number of consecutive hits reaches "5" times, or even if the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times, the setting suggestion effect may always be executed. Then, when the number of consecutive hits reaches "5" times, the non-deterministic setting suggestion effect is executed (for example, the setting suggestion effect indicating the setting value "1" or the setting value "3" is executed) When the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times, a definite setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value "1" may be performed). With this configuration, it is possible to add sufficient added value to the continuous "10" times which is more difficult than the case where "5" times per game.

(Step S303-2-24)
In step S303-2-24, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the number of times counter per 10 consecutive rounds provided in the sub RAM 203, and determines whether or not the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "3". Then, if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "3", the process proceeds to step S303-2-25, and if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is not "3", the process proceeds to step S303-2-30. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-2-25)
In step S303-2-25, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-26.

(Step S303-2-26)
In step S303-2-26, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-25. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-27.

(Step S303-2-27)
In step S303-2-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-27. When the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-2-28. When the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (2/3 in variation) is finished, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-28)
In step S303-2-28, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-29.

(Step S303-2-29)
In step S303-2-29, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the fifth condition in the variation is satisfied when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment by continuing the game per 10 rounds, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Step S303-2-30)
In step S303-2-30, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the counter of the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds provided in the sub RAM 203, and determines whether the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "6". Then, if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "6", the process proceeds to step S303-2-31. If the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is not "6", the process proceeds to step S303-2-35. Migrate the process.

(Step S303-2-31)
In step S303-2-31, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-32.

(Step S303-2-32)
In step S303-2-32, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-31. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-33.

(Step S303-2-33)
In step S303-2-33, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-34.

(Step S303-2-34)
In step S303-2-34, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  Thus, the sixth condition in the variation is satisfied when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment by continuing the game per 10 rounds, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest. In addition, when the number of hits for 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times, the setting suggestion effect is performed, and the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to Fig. 21 (A) without loss is always referred to. Execution of the setting suggestion effect can provide the player with useful information. Note that it is preferable to use the fifth condition and the sixth condition in combination in combination. In this case, even when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3" times or when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times, the setting suggestion effect may be performed without fail. And when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3" times, non-decisive setting suggestion production is executed (for example, setting suggestion production which suggests setting value "1" or setting value "3" is executed) Then, when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times, the definite setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value "1" may be executed). . With such a configuration, it is possible to add sufficient value to "6" consecutive times which is more difficult than "3" consecutive times per 10 rounds.

(Step S303-2-35)
In step S303-2-35, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to receive a symbol designation command. That is, it is determined in step S301 in FIG. 16 whether a symbol designation command has been received as a main command. When the symbol designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-2-36. When the symbol designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-2-42.

(Step S303-2-36)
In step S303-2-36, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is the special symbol D or the special symbol G (whether it is a loss). Then, if the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is either the special symbol D or the special symbol G, the process proceeds to step S303-2-37, and the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is the special symbol D, or If it is not any of the special symbol G, the processing for each gaming state (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-2-37)
In step S303-2-37, the sub CPU 201 reads out from the sub ROM 202 the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 21D, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the decoration symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-38.

(Step S303-2-38)
In step S303-2-38, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect read out in step S303-2-37. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-39.

(Step S303-2-39)
In step S303-2-39, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-38. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-2-40. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-40)
In step S303-2-40, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect (decorative design) determined by the extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect (decorative design) determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-41.

(Step S303-2-41)
In step S303-2-41, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the seventh condition in the variation is established when the special symbol D or the special symbol G (all lost) is received as the symbol designation command. Then, a setting suggestion effect is performed using a combination of left hand symbol designs of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c. Originally, the combination of the lost symbols during the change was not interesting to the player, but as in the present embodiment, by giving the possibility of performing the setting suggestion effect, what kind of It can be interesting to see if a combination of lost designs is displayed. It should be noted that the condition may be satisfied when the special symbol D or the special symbol G (all lost) is received as a symbol designation command even during non-shortening, or as a symbol designation command only during non-shortening. The condition may be satisfied when the symbol D or the special symbol G (both lost) is received.

(Step S303-2-42)
In step S303-2-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is time to receive a gate passage command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether a gate passing command is received as a main command. If the gate passing command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-2-43. If the gate passing command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-2-48.

(Step S303-2-43)
In step S303-2-43, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-44.

(Step S303-2-44)
In step S303-2-44, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-43. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-45.

(Step S303-2-45)
In step S303-2-45, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-44. If the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-2-46. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (3/3 in the middle of variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-46)
In step S303-2-46, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-47.

(Step S303-2-47)
In step S303-2-47, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the eighth condition during variation is satisfied when the gate passage command is received (that is, when the gaming ball passes through the gate member 20). In this way, in addition to the original enjoyment of determining whether or not a hit is determined in the normal symbol hitting determination process, it is possible to have an expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the improvement of game fun Can be In addition, as long as the game ball configuration allows the game ball to pass through the gate member 20 also at the time of left-handed, it may be a condition during non-shortening and during medium-shortening, or any condition during non-shortening or middle It may be

(Step S303-2-48)
In step S303-2-48, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute a specific advance notice effect. That is, as a result of determining the above-described effect symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the special notice during variation. Then, when executing the special notice during variation, the process proceeds to step S303-2-49, and when not performing the special notice during variation, the processing according to each gaming state (3/3 during variation) is performed. After the process, the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-2-49)
In step S303-2-49, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-2-50.

(Step S303-2-50)
In step S303-2-50, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-2-49. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-2-51.

(Step S303-2-51)
In step S303-2-51, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-2-50. If the player wins, the process proceeds to step S303-2-52. If the player does not win, the game state-specific process (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-2-52)
In step S303-2-52, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. When the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-2-53.

(Step S303-2-53)
In step S303-2-53, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in variation) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the ninth condition in the variation is satisfied in the case of executing the specific advance notice in the variation. As a result, in addition to the original enjoyment of reaching reach and the possibility that a winning game may be awarded, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and the game is entertaining I can improve it.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowcharts of FIG. 30 to FIG. 32 is satisfied and the execution extraction of the setting suggestion effect is won and the case where it is not hit. First, FIG. 33 shows the cases of non-exclusion in (A-1) and (A-2), and shows the cases of admission in (B-1) to (B-5), showing variation in length. A background image 26R (night background image) is displayed. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1) of FIG. 33, the “symbol variation game” (in FIG. 33, for convenience, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c fluctuate. (Showing only the situation shown in the figure), it indicates that "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition has occurred". Here, “the generation of the setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs” corresponds to the satisfaction of the first condition, the second condition, and the seventh condition to the ninth condition. For example, assuming that the "symbol variation game" shown by (A-1) and (B-1) is a variation of the 200th rotation, "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs", and as a result of performing the lottery, it is not a hit If it is, as shown in (A-2), there is no change in the display content (background image) displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next “symbol change game”). On the other hand, if it is a win, as shown in (B-2) to (B-5), there is a change in the display content displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next "symbol change game") It occurs. That is, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as shown by (B-2) The "golden full moon" image 26S is displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next "symbol change game"). This "golden full moon" image 26S is an image that is displayed only when the setting suggested in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting "1" is met. There is an effect (in fact, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. As shown in (B-3), the "half moon" image 26T is displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next "symbol change game"). The “half moon” image 26 T is a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting value “1” or setting value “2” when the setting value set for pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”. It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. , (B-4), the “crescent moon” image 26U is displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next “symbol change game”). In this "crescent moon" image 26U, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3", a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "1" or the setting value "3" It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. As shown in (B-5), the "full moon" image 26V is displayed on the image display device 26 in the next change (the next "symbol change game"). The “full moon” image 26V is a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting value “2” or setting value “4” when the setting value set for pachinko gaming machine 1 is “2” or “4”. It is an image that is displayed only in the case of winning. In addition, the images (26S to 26V) suggesting the setting value are images exclusively indicating the setting value, and do not indicate the degree of expectation (possibility) to the winning game.

  As described above, when “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs” and it becomes a win, an image (26S to 26V) suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed during fluctuation I made it. Further, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, the 26S indicating the setting value definitely is displayed, and the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “2”. In the case of “4”, since 26T, 26U, and 26V suggesting the setting value indeterminately can be displayed, the display of 26S can impart an improvement in gaming will and a sense of superiority, and 26T , 26 U, and 26 V, it is possible to give pleasure to infer the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in FIG. 33, the example which performs a setting suggestion production was described during fluctuation of the next fluctuation (the following "symbol fluctuation game"), but the timing which performs a setting suggestion production is the next fluctuation (next " It is not limited during the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation game "). For example, as mentioned in the above-mentioned example of non-shortening, it may be at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the fluctuation, or may be at the time of starting the fluctuation of the next fluctuation (the next "symbol fluctuation game") , It may be at the time of the change stop of the next change (the next "symbol change game"). In particular, at the time of the fluctuation stop, the combination of the decorative symbols of lost may be stopped based on the table shown in FIG. 21 (D) in accordance with the satisfaction of the seventh condition.

  Next, (A-1) and (A-2) show the case of non-passage, (B-1) and (B-2) show the case of hit and FIG. 34 (A-3), (A-4) shows the case of non-committee, and (B-3) and (B-4) show the case of tenderness. FIG. 34 corresponds to the satisfaction of the third to sixth conditions. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1), the ending screen of the hit game is displayed. In both (A-1) and (B-1), it shows that "per 10 rounds" was obtained twice and "per 5 rounds" was obtained three times, and the number of consecutive hits was Indicates that it was 5 times. Then, in the non-test case (A-2), only the character image ChaF is displayed in the first rotation after the end of the winning game, while in the case of the hit (B-2) Is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3” along with the character image ChaF at the first rotation after the end of the winning game, the setting value “1” or the setting value “ A "crescent moon" image 26U displayed when a setting suggestion effect that suggests "3." Similarly, (A-3) and (B-3) also indicate that the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds has become three, and in the case of non-competition (A-4), the hit game While only the character image ChaF is displayed in the first rotation after the end, in the case of winning (B-4), the character image ChaF is displayed in the first rotation after the end of the winning game. The crescent moon "image 26U is displayed. In this way, when the number of consecutive hits is 5 times or when the number of consecutive 10 rounds is 3 times, as described above, the setting suggestion effect can be performed, as described above. In addition to the sense of accomplishment, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed. In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 34, between (A-1), (B-1), (A-2), (B-2), (A-3), (B), The above-mentioned model name image 26o or maker name image 26p may be displayed between -3), (A-4) and (B-4), and these images are displayed. While the game is in progress, it may be set as an impossibility period of the setting suggestion effect. As a result, similar to the above-described effects, it is possible to expect an effect that the advertising effect is not diluted. Moreover, you may display the message image 26q which urges performing a moderate game, Moreover, while the said image is displayed, it is good also as an impossibility period of a setting suggestion production, and forgetting to take out a valuable-value medium A message image for prevention may be displayed, and while the image is displayed, a setting suggestion effect may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 43, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect in the winning game, the processing performed when the condition is satisfied, and the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect will be described. .

  The flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37 are processes performed according to the received command or the like after the main command is received in step S301 of FIG. In addition, “perform within a predetermined period?” Shown in step S303-3-2 constitutes a first condition for performing execution suggestion of setting suggestion effect in the game, and thereafter, similarly, step S303-3-3. 7 and step S303-3-8 constitute a second condition, step S303-3-14 and step S303-3-15 constitute a third condition, and step S303-3-21 is a fourth condition. Step S303-3-27 and step S303-3-28 constitute the fifth condition, step S303-3-33 constitutes the sixth condition, and step S303-3-39 is the seventh. The step S303-3-45 constitutes an eighth condition, and the step S303-3-51 constitutes a ninth condition. That is, when the first to ninth conditions are satisfied, a determination is made as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, and if the win is given, the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. The conditions are not limited to the first to ninth conditions, and other conditions may be included, and for convenience, they are collectively described in the flowchart of FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, for example, the first condition The first condition and the second condition may be provided, or all conditions may be provided as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of the conditions may be changed as appropriate. In the flowcharts of FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, although the "extraction" is performed, the setting suggestive effect may be always performed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "extraction".

(Step S303-3-1)
In step S303-3-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the suggestion effect execution completed flag is ON. Even during the winning game, as in the above-mentioned variation or shortening, once the setting suggestion effect is performed, the flag is turned ON, and thereafter, the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the hit game is configured Because the period of stay is short). Then, if the suggestion effect execution completion flag is ON, the processing according to each gaming state (one in 1/3 winning game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. 16 and the suggestion effect execution completion flag is ON. If not, the process proceeds to step S303-3-2.

(Step S303-3-2)
In step S303-3-2, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the variation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203, and hits within a predetermined period (the determination result of the “special symbol hitting determination processing” is “hit”). Determine if there is. Note that another method may be used to determine whether or not it is a hit within a predetermined period. For example, time may be used. Further, the starting point of the measurement may be at power on or at the end of the hit game. For example, if it is a hit within 30 minutes from the power on, it may be determined as a hit within a predetermined period, or if it is a hit within 100 revolutions from the power on, it may be determined as a hit within a predetermined period It is also good. Similarly, if it is a hit within 30 minutes from the end of the hit game, it may be determined that the hit is within a predetermined period, and if it is a hit within 100 rotations from the end of the hit game, within a predetermined period It may be determined to be a hit. In addition, both the power-on and the end of the hit game may be the starting point. Then, if it is a win in the predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S303-3-3, and if it is not a win in the predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S303-3-7.

(Step S303-3-3)
In step S303-3-3, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-4.

(Step S303-3-4)
In step S303-3-4, after the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-3. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-5.

(Step S303-3-5)
In step S303-3-5, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-6.

(Step S303-3-6)
In step S303-3-6, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is set to ON, the processing by each gaming state (1/3 in winning game) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the first condition in the winning game is satisfied if it falls within a predetermined period from the time of power on or the end of the hitting game (the determination result of the "special symbol determination processing is" hit "). Do. Thus, for example, if the starting point is at power on, it is possible to increase the gaming motivation from the time of power on to the passage of a predetermined period, and if the starting point is on the end of gaming, the predetermined time from the end of the winning game It is possible to increase the game motivation until the period passes. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A with no loss in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is referred to if it is a hit within the predetermined period, the setting suggestion effect is always executed Thus, it is possible to further enhance the above-mentioned game intention.

(Step S303-3-7)
In step S303-3-7, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is time to receive a round command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether a round command is received as a main command. When the round command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-8, and when the round command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-14.

(Step S303-3-8)
In step S303-3-8, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a specific round (for example, "4" round). Here, in determining whether or not it is a specific round, a counter similar to the round number counter provided in the main RAM 103 is provided in the sub RAM 203 so that the sub CPU 201 can count the number of rounds. Alternatively, the round command itself may indicate the number of rounds (for example, a round command indicating "4" rounds). Also, a plurality of specific rounds may be provided in one winning game. For example, if it is a winning game to which the “5” round is awarded, one specific round may be provided, or if it is a winning game to which the “10” round is awarded, two specific rounds may be given. It may be provided. Moreover, if it is a winning game in which the “5” round is awarded, the specific round may be provided only in the case of the winning game in which the “10” round is awarded, without providing the specific round, The opposite may be true. Then, if it is determined that it is a specific round, the processing proceeds to step S303-3-9, and if it is determined that it is not a specific round, the processing according to each gaming state (1/3 during a hit game) is finished. Then, the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-3-9)
In step S303-3-9, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-10.

(Step S303-3-10)
In step S303-3-10, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-9. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-11.

(Step S303-3-11)
In step S303-3-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-10. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-12. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (1/3 in the game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-12)
In step S303-3-12, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-13.

(Step S303-3-13)
In step S303-3-13, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is set to ON, the processing by each gaming state (1/3 in winning game) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the second condition in the hit game is satisfied when it is a specific round (for example, “4” round) as a result of receiving the round command. This makes it possible to have an expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the round of the winning game in which the effect is merely developed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Step S303-3-14)
In step S303-3-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is time to receive an inter-round interval command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether an inter-round interval command is received as a main command. When the inter-round interval command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-15, and when the inter-round interval command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-21.

(Step S303-3-15)
In step S303-3-15, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a specific inter-round interval (for example, an interval between “4” rounds and “5 rounds”). Here, in determining whether or not it is a specific inter-round interval, in the sub RAM 203 described above, a counter similar to the round number counter is provided to grasp a round, and then it is a specific inter-round interval? Whether or not it may be grasped may be grasped, or after grasping the round by the round command itself, it may be grasped whether or not it is a specific interval between rounds. Also, as with the above-mentioned specific round, a specific interval between rounds may be provided in a plurality in one winning game, or may be different depending on the type of hitting game. And when it is determined that it is a specific interval between rounds, the process proceeds to step S303-3-16, and when it is determined that it is not a specific interval between rounds, processing according to each gaming state (per game in progress 1 / After 3), the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-3-16)
In step S303-3-16, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-17.

(Step S303-3-17)
In step S303-3-17, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-16. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-18.

(Step S303-3-18)
In step S303-3-18, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-17. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-19. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (1/3 in the game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-19)
In step S303-3-19, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-20.

(Step S303-3-20)
In step S303-3-20, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is set to ON, the processing by each gaming state (1/3 in winning game) is finished, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  Thus, if the third condition in the winning game is a specific inter-round interval (for example, an interval between "4" round and "5 round") as a result of receiving the inter-round interval command. To establish. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed at intervals between rounds during a hit game in which the effects were merely developed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Step S303-3-21)
In step S303-3-21, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is time to receive an ending command. That is, in step S301 in FIG. 16, it is determined whether an ending command has been received as a main command. Then, when the ending command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-22, and when the ending command is not received, the process proceeds to step S303-3-27.

(Step S303-3-22)
In step S303-3-22, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-23.

(Step S303-3-23)
In step S303-3-23, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-22. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-24.

(Step S303-3-24)
In step S303-3-24, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-23. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-25. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (2/3 in a per game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-25)
In step S303-3-25, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-26.

(Step S303-3-26)
In step S303-3-26, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in a per game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the fourth condition in the hit game is satisfied when the ending command is received. In this way, it is possible to give an expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the notification of information related to the hit game or the ending of the hit game in which the effect was merely developed, so that the game is entertaining Can be improved.

(Step S303-3-27)
In step S303-3-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether it is a mini game result notification round (for example, the "9" round) based on the reception of the round command. Here, the "mini game" is an effect to be performed during the hit game, and the "o x quiz" is displayed on the image display device 26, and the answer is made using the cross key button 16. is there. As an example of control, when the left button is pressed, "○", when the right button is pressed, "X", and when neither is pressed, "○" is automatically selected, and in the "5" round The first question, the first question in the "6" round, the first question in the "7" round, and the results are reported in the "9" round. In addition, the above three questions are managed as one set in a scenario, and for each scenario, for example, if “Scenario 1”, the first question is “left” in the cross key button 16 and the second question is the cross key The correct answer information is stored such as “left” in the button 16 and “right” in the cross key button 16. Then, the correctness / incorrectness is judged in comparison with the operation input of the cross key button 16 actually operated by the player. Then, if all questions are correct, the setting suggestion effect is executed. If it is the result informing round in such a mini game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-28, and if it is not the result informing round in the mini game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-33.

(Step S303-3-28)
In step S303-3-28, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the result of the mini game is success or not. That is, as a result of determining the above-mentioned correctness or incorrectness, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether all the questions are correct answers satisfying all the correct answer information corresponding to the executed scenario. Then, if the result of the mini game is successful, the process proceeds to step S303-3-29, and if the result of the mini game is not successful, the processing by each gaming state (2/3 during a hit game) is finished. Then, the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-3-29)
In step S303-3-29, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202, and sets the table, for example, in a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-30.

(Step S303-3-30)
In step S303-3-30, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-3-29. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-31.

(Step S303-3-31)
In step S303-3-31, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-32.

(Step S303-3-32)
In step S303-3-32, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in a per game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the fifth condition in a hit game is satisfied when it is notified that all the questions are correct in the result notification round of the mini game performed in the hit game. In this way, depending on the result of the mini game, it is possible to have an expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed depending on the result of the mini game while the effect is merely developed. It can make you think that you want to play a game. In addition, when all questions in the mini game are correctly answered, the setting suggestion effect is always performed because the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. So you can make me think of playing mini-games more.

(Step S303-3-33)
In step S303-3-33, the sub CPU 201 receives the above-mentioned winning prize ball number (here, the total winning ball number is obtained from the value of the big winning opening winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 and the number of winning balls "10". It is determined whether or not the ball has exceeded 5000 shots. For example, the winning game in the present embodiment is "10" count per round, "1" count, "10" prize balls, so "100" balls can be won per round, "10" If it is a round, it will be possible to win the "1000" ball. Therefore, if the number of times the “10” round is awarded is made “5” consecutive times, a positive determination will be made in the process. In addition, if over winning is generated, it may exceed 5,000 in less than "5" times. Then, if the total earned ball is over 5,000, the process proceeds to step S303-3-34. If the total ball is not greater than 5,000, the process proceeds to step S303-3-39. Transition.

(Step S303-3-34)
In step S303-3-34, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-35.

(Step S303-3-35)
In step S303-3-35, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-34. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-36.

(Step S303-3-36)
In step S303-3-36, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-35. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-37. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (2/3 in a per game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-37)
In step S303-3-37, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-38.

(Step S303-3-38)
In step S303-3-38, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing for each gaming state (2/3 in a per game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the sixth condition in a hit game is satisfied when the number of winning balls in consecutive hit games exceeds 5,000. As a result, in addition to the satisfaction by having been able to continuously win and obtain many prize balls, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed, and it is possible to improve gaming interest. . In addition, in order to reach 5000 shots earlier, during a hit game, it is possible to make a game while wishing the occurrence of an over winning etc., and to concentrate on the hit game. In addition, although it has reached 5000 shots, if it is not in the execution of the setting suggestion effect, it may be determined that it has exceeded 5000 in the next hit game as long as it is a continuous hit.

(Step S303-3-39)
In step S303-3-39, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command is received. That is, it is determined in step S301 in FIG. 16 whether a special winning opening winning command has been received as a main command. Then, if the special winning opening winning command has been received, the processing proceeds to step S303-3-40, and if the special winning opening winning command has not been received, the processing proceeds to step S303-3-45. Do.

(Step S303-3-40)
In step S303-3-40, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-41.

(Step S303-3-41)
In step S303-3-41, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-3-40. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-42.

(Step S303-3-42)
In step S303-3-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-41. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-43. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-43)
In step S303-3-43, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-44.

(Step S303-3-44)
In step S303-3-44, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the seventh condition during the hit game is satisfied when the game ball enters the big winning opening 24. Originally, entering the game ball into the big winning opening 24 was not interesting for the player because only the winning ball is given, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed as in this embodiment By granting the possibility, it is also possible to make the game ball enter the big winning opening 24 with interest.

(Step S303-3-45)
In step S303-3-45, sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of receptions of the special winning opening winning command per round, which is counted by sub CPU 201, exceeds "10", that is, whether over winning has occurred or not. Do. Then, when an over winning occurs, the process proceeds to step S303-3-46, and when an over winning does not occur, the process proceeds to step S303-3-51.

(Step S303-3-46)
In step S303-3-46, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-47.

(Step S303-3-47)
In step S303-3-47, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-46. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-48.

(Step S303-3-48)
In step S303-3-48, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-47. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-49. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-49)
In step S303-3-49, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-50.

(Step S303-3-50)
In step S303-3-50, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the eighth condition in a hit game is satisfied when the gaming ball enters the large winning opening 24 (one game ball exceeding 10 balls) per round. As a result, by generating an over winning, it is possible to give an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be executed, and it is possible to concentrate on hit games.

(Step S303-3-51)
In step S303-3-51, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-described attacker full open (here, the special winning opening full open) has occurred. Then, when an attacker full open occurs, the process proceeds to step S303-3-52, and when an attacker full open does not occur, the processing according to each gaming state (3/3 in winning game) is ended. The processing shifts to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-3-52)
In step S303-3-52, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S303-3-53.

(Step S303-3-53)
In step S303-3-53, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-3-52. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S303-3-54.

(Step S303-3-54)
In step S303-3-54, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S303-3-53. If the player wins the game, the process proceeds to step S303-3-55. If the player does not win the game, the game state-specific process (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate

(Step S303-3-55)
In step S303-3-55, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by extraction to the output port. When the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set to the output port, the process proceeds to step S303-3-56.

(Step S303-3-56)
In step S303-3-56, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completion flag in the suggestion effect execution completion flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completion flag is turned ON, the processing by each gaming state (3/3 in winning game) is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S304 in FIG.

  As described above, the ninth condition during the hit game is satisfied when the big winning opening full open is generated. As a result, although it is not possible to obtain the winning balls for the part that can not be hit when 10 balls of game balls can not be entered per round due to external factors, it is suggested to set instead By giving the possibility that the rendition will be executed, it is possible to soften the sense of loss due to the fact that the winning balls for the number of times the user did not enter can not be obtained.

  FIGS. 38 to 43 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowchart of FIG. 35 to FIG. First, FIG. 38 corresponds to the fulfillment of the first condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in FIG. 38, (A) shows the first appearance "123" in the morning when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and shows a display mode when the gaming store is opened. Then, from the opening of this morning, as shown in (B), make the game ball enter the first starting opening 21 within 100 rotations (or within 30 minutes), and in the "special symbol winning judgment processing" When it is determined to be a hit, the setting suggestion effects shown in (C-1) to (C-4) are executed during the hit game in which the big winning opening 24 is opened. That is, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as indicated by (C-1) In the first round of the hit game, a character image 26 w is displayed on the image display device 26 together with a round display image 32 a showing the first round. The character image 26 w is an image displayed only when the setting suggestion set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting “1” is true (Factor Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the setting value “1”. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. As shown in (C-2), in the first round of the hit game, the character display 26 displays the character image 26w and the character image 26x together with the round display image 32a indicating the first round. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 x indicate that the setting value suggested to the setting value “1” or “2” is indicated when the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. As shown in (C-3), in the first round of the hit game, a character image 26 w and a character image 26 y are displayed on the image display device 26 together with the round display image 32 a showing the first round. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 y indicate a setting that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. As shown in (C-4), in the first round of the hit game, the character display 26 displays the character image 26x and the character image 26z together with the round display image 32a indicating the first round. In the character image 26x and the character image 26z, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Note that, as described in the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37, the establishment of the first condition refers to the table shown in FIG. 21A, so that the setting suggestion effect is always performed. Thereby, when the game arcade is opened, the motivation to try to play a game can be improved, and it can be connected to the operation up at the time of opening the game. In addition, in determining whether it is a hit within 30 minutes from the opening time, referring to the time measured by the above-mentioned RTC (real time clock) device 204, it is a hitting within 30 minutes from the opening time You need to judge

  Next, FIG. 39 corresponds to the satisfaction of the second condition and the satisfaction of the seventh condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in FIG. 39, it shows that a round game of a hit game is being performed, and the big winning opening 24 is open. (A) shows a screen during a normal (non-setting suggestion effect) round game, and a screen showing a normal round game, a round display image 32a showing a third round as an example, A winning symbol image 32b showing that the symbol combination "777" has been hit and a character image ChaF for liveliness are displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a win due to the establishment of the second condition or the establishment of the seventh condition, the screen in the round game shown in (B-1) to (B-4) is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as indicated by (B-1), In addition to the image shown in A), a character image 26w is displayed. The character image 26 w is an image displayed only when the setting suggestion set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting “1” is true (Factor Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the setting value “1”. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26 w and a character image 26 x are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 x indicate that the setting value suggested to the setting value “1” or “2” is indicated when the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. And (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26 w and the character image 26 y are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 y indicate a setting that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26x and a character image 26z are displayed. In the character image 26x and the character image 26z, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. As a result, as described above, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed in the round of the hit game in which the effects were merely developed.

  Next, FIG. 40 corresponds to the satisfaction of the third condition, the satisfaction of the eighth condition, and the satisfaction of the ninth condition described in the description of the flowcharts in FIGS. That is, in FIG. 40, it shows during the interval between rounds of the hit game, the big winning opening 24 is closed. (A) shows a screen during an interval between rounds (when a setting suggestion effect is not performed), and on a screen during an interval between rounds, a round display image 32a showing the first round as an example And, an END image indicating that the first round has ended is displayed next to it. Further, a NEXT image indicating the transition to the next round and a round display image 32f indicating the second round as an example are displayed beside the NEXT image. In addition, a character image ChaF for liveliness is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is that the result of the extraction is the result of the third condition, the eighth condition, or the ninth condition, then (B-1) to (B-4) A screen showing a round game shown is displayed. That is, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as indicated by (B-1), In addition to the image shown in A), a character image 26w is displayed. The character image 26 w is an image displayed only when the setting suggestion set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting “1” is true (Factor Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the setting value “1”. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26 w and a character image 26 x are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 x indicate that the setting value suggested to the setting value “1” or “2” is indicated when the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. And (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26 w and the character image 26 y are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 y indicate a setting that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26x and a character image 26z are displayed. In the character image 26x and the character image 26z, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. As a result, as described above, it is possible to have an expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the interval between rounds during the winning game where the effect is merely developed.

  Next, FIG. 41 corresponds to the satisfaction of the fourth condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in FIG. 41, the ending of the hit game is shown, and the big winning opening 24 is closed. (A) shows a normal (setting suggestion effect is not performed) ending screen, and a hit END image indicating that the hit game has ended and a character image ChaF for liveliness are displayed. There is. On the other hand, as a result of performing the lottery due to the establishment of the fourth condition, as a result of winning, the screen in the round game shown in (B-1) to (B-4) is displayed. That is, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” is met, as indicated by (B-1), In addition to the image shown in A), a character image 26w is displayed. The character image 26 w is an image displayed only when the setting suggestion set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting “1” is true (Factor Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the setting value “1”. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” is met. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26 w and a character image 26 x are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 x indicate that the setting value suggested to the setting value “1” or “2” is indicated when the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “2”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”, the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” is met. And (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26 w and the character image 26 y are displayed. The character image 26 w and the character image 26 y indicate a setting that suggests the setting value “1” or the setting value “3” when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or “3”. It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Also, if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" is met. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), a character image 26x and a character image 26z are displayed. In the character image 26x and the character image 26z, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" It is an image that is displayed only when an effect is given. Thereby, as described above, giving an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed in the notification of information related to the hit game or the ending of the hit game in which the effects were merely developed. Can. In addition, when the first condition, the fifth condition, the sixth condition to the ninth condition are satisfied, and the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, as well as the fourth condition is satisfied. The setting suggestion effect may be executed using the ending of the hit game.

  Next, FIG. 42 corresponds to the satisfaction of the fifth condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in FIG. 42, (A) to (D) show during a round game of a hit game, the big winning opening 24 is open, and (E) shows an ending of a hitting game, and a big winning opening 24 Is closed. Further, FIG. 42 shows that the above-mentioned mini game is being played during the round game of the hit game. That is, in (A), a round display image 32a showing that it is a round game of the 5th round as an example, a cross key button image 32c, and a quiz image 32d showing a ×× problem are displayed. Then, the player uses the left and right buttons of the cross key button 16 to select an answer, and the example of (A) indicates that the left button has been pressed. Similarly, (B) indicates that the second question is presented in the sixth round, and (C) indicates that the third question is presented in the seventh round. And in (D), the image which shows that all the questions were correct in the quiz given in the 5th to 7th rounds is displayed in the 9th round, and in (E), the quiz presented on the 5th to 7th round In addition to the normal ending screen described in FIG. 41, the character image 26 w is displayed as a bonus for all questions being correctly answered (when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”. In the setting suggestion effect which suggests setting value "1". Thereby, as described above, it can be made to try to actively play the mini game.

  Next, FIG. 43 corresponds to the fulfillment of the sixth condition described in the description of the flowcharts of FIGS. That is, in FIG. 43, it indicates that a winning round game is being played, and the special winning opening 24 is open. (A-1) to (A-3) show cases in which the total earned out ball has not reached 5,000, and in (B-1) to (B-3), the total earned out ball is 5000 It shows the case where it hits the execution lottery of the setting indication effect performed when reaching the departure and reaching 5000. In (A-1), a total acquisition ball image 32e (950 as an example) showing total winning ball is displayed, and in (A-2), a total acquisition ball image 32e showing total winning ball (As an example, 1000) is displayed, and in (A-3), a total acquisition ball image 32e (as one example, 1200) indicating a total winning ball is displayed. On the other hand, in (B-1), a total acquisition ball image 32e (4950 as an example) indicating total winning ball is displayed, and in (B-2), a total acquisition ball indicating total acquisition ball is displayed. A ball image 32e (for example, 5000) is displayed, and a "5000-shot OVER!" Image showing that 5000 shots have been obtained is displayed, and in (B-3), the total obtained balls are obtained. The total acquisition balls shown 32e (5200 as an example) are displayed, and the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed (the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1” or In the case of "2", it corresponds to a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "1" or the setting value "2". As a result, as described above, in addition to the satisfaction due to continuous winning of winning many prize balls, it is possible to have an expectation that setting suggestion effects may be performed. Note that the character images 26w, 26x, 26y, 26z are effects that only indicate setting values, and other indications (for example, transition to a probability change gaming state after the end of a hit game) are not performed.

  In the example described above, an example in which the process relating to the setting suggestion effect is performed by the main control substrate 100 and the effect control substrate 200 has been described, but the setting suggestion effect is performed by controlling the payout control substrate 300 as follows. You can also. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion effect execution process performed in an interrupt process which is periodically executed by interrupting the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300, and FIG. 45 is a setting suggestion effect An animation showing an example of

(Step S401)
In step S401, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of times the ball lending button 12 has been pressed is ten. Here, the payout RAM 303 is provided with a pressing frequency counter that counts the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed, and the payout CPU 301 receives the pressing information of the ball lending button 12 and performs payout for the ball lending. Every time, the value of the pressing number counter is incremented by one. Then, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of depressions of the ball lending button 12 is ten times with reference to the value of the number of times of depression counter. That is, when the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 10, this corresponds to when the payout for 10 times of ball lending is performed. The state in which the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is ten may be any of "not in change", "in change", and "in hit game" in the above-mentioned example, but "error" Since the player holds many game balls in the "short hit" and "in a hit game", it is not assumed that the ball lending button 12 is pressed. Therefore, it is assumed that it is an event that can occur "in the middle of unchangeable". Then, if the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 10 times, the process proceeds to step S402, and if the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is less than 10 times or 11 or more, step S406. Transfer the process to

(Step S402)
In step S402, the payout CPU 301 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the payout ROM 302, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. In addition, when performing the setting suggestion effect by the payout CPU 301, it is preferable to store the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B in the payout ROM 302 in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to exchange data with the main control board 100 every time the setting suggestion effect is performed. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S403.

(Step S403)
In step S403, the payout CPU 301 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S402. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S404.

(Step S404)
In step S404, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not execution of the setting suggestion effect has been performed as a result of the extraction in step S403. Then, if the player wins, the process proceeds to step S405. If the player does not win, the setting suggestive effect execution process is ended, and the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300 is periodically interrupted and executed. Shift to another process in the interrupt process to be performed.

(Step S405)
In step S405, the payout CPU 301 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the extraction in the output port. When the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the notification device controllable by the payout control board 300. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect execution processing is finished, and the interrupt processing is executed by periodically interrupting the main processing (not shown) of the payout control board 300. Move to other processes in

(Step S406)
In step S406, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of depressions of the ball lending button 12 is 20 times with reference to the value of the number of depressions counter. Then, if the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 20 times, the process proceeds to step S407. If the number of times the ball lending button 12 is not pressed is 20 times, the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended, and the payout control is performed. It shifts to another processing in the interrupt processing which is periodically interrupted and executed in the main processing (not shown) of the substrate 300.

(Step S407)
In step S407, the payout CPU 301 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the payout ROM 302, and sets it in, for example, a register or the like. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read out, the process proceeds to step S408.

(Step S408)
In step S408, the payout CPU 301 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S407. Then, when the lottery process is finished, the process proceeds to step S409.

(Step S409)
In step S409, the payout CPU 301 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the extraction in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect execution processing is finished, and the interrupt processing is executed by periodically interrupting the main processing (not shown) of the payout control board 300. Move to other processes in

  By such processing, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 45 can be executed. In FIG. 45, (A) shows a normal display mode of the balance display unit 12a, and (B) shows a specific display mode of the balance display unit 12a. That is, in any case, as an example, the balance display unit 12a displays that the balance of the valuable medium is "50", and in (A), it is a normal display mode, for example, red display Is displayed as "50". On the other hand, in (B), for example, “50” is displayed in a specific display mode, for example, a green display, and suggests a setting value “1” or a setting value “2” as an example. In addition, indication of set value “1” or set value “2”, indication of set value “1”, set value “1” or set value by lighting red, blinking red, lighting green, etc. The suggestion of “3”, the preset value “2” or the preset value “4” may be suggested. Further, (C) shows a normal display mode of the ball lending permission lamp 12b, and (D) shows a specific display mode of the ball lending permission lamp 12b. That is, in any case, while informing that it is possible to lend a ball, in (C), it is lit with a normal display mode, for example, a red display. On the other hand, in (D), the display is a specific display mode, for example, it is lit with a green display, suggesting a set value “1” or a set value “2” as an example. In addition, indication of set value “1” or set value “2”, indication of set value “1”, set value “1” or set value by lighting red, blinking red, lighting green, etc. The suggestion of “3”, the preset value “2” or the preset value “4” may be suggested.

  As described above, by the management by the payout control board 300, the setting suggestion effect can be performed without particularly requiring the command from the main control board 100. In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be performed without using each effect device of the effect control board 200. And, if the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 10 times or 20 times, there is a possibility that the player has not been able to get the ball out for a long time, so the player feels a loss There is also a possibility that The sense of loss can be mitigated by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be performed under such circumstances. Further, similarly to the above-described example, since the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table without loss described with reference to FIG. It can relieve the feeling of the player who is getting a feeling.

  As described above, according to the first embodiment, in the “non-shortening” (for example, FIG. 22 to FIG. 24), each execution of the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed When a condition (for example, the first condition to the eleventh condition) is satisfied, the extraction is performed, and when the extraction is made, the setting indication effect is performed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 25). In addition, in the “variable short” (for example, FIG. 30 to FIG. 32), each condition (for example, the first condition or the like) for executing the execution of the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the ninth condition is satisfied, the extraction is performed, and when the extraction is made, the setting indication effect is performed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 33). In addition, each condition (for example, the first condition ...) for performing the execution suggestion of the setting suggestion effect which suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in "per game in progress" (for example, Figs. 35 to 37) When the ninth condition is satisfied, the extraction is performed, and when the extraction is made, the setting indication effect is performed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 39). As a result, in each of the "non-shortening", the "shortening" and the "per game", the fun of estimating the setting value by the execution of the setting suggestion effect is added, so that further improvement of the gaming intention can be achieved. it can.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment, only differences from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and the description of the common portions will be omitted. Therefore, it is needless to say that the setting suggestion effect described in the first embodiment may be applied in the second embodiment, for example. Further, it is needless to say that the contents described in the third embodiment described later may be applied in the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 46 shows the second embodiment ver. 47 shows a second embodiment ver. Of the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 6). It is. In FIG. 46, unlike FIG. 5, an upper limit is provided to the probability variation gaming state frequency (hereinafter, also referred to as “ST frequency”), and “28” when this is the setting value “1” of (A-1). And the setting value of "A-2" is "29" times, and the setting value of "A-3" is "3" times of "30" times. If the set value "4" of (A-4) is "31," it is "31." As described above, the setting value “1” advantageous for the player has the smallest number of STs, and the setting value “4” disadvantageous for the player has the largest number of STs. The ST continuation rate is “63.8%” common to all set values, which is a consideration for not having different ST continuation rates for each value. Note that "ST Continuity Rate" refers to the probability of winning next time when entering into the probability variation gaming state, for example, the average continuous winning expectation value when entering into the probability variation gaming state is common to all set values. , "2.77" times. Moreover, unlike FIG. 6 of the first embodiment, the ST rush rate (the rush rate to the probability change gaming state) is “100%” in all settings in common, and the number of variations is also “100 in all settings in common”. "It has become. On the other hand, the number of times of the time saving game state is "72" when it is the setting value "1" of (A-1), and "71" when it is the setting value "2" of (A-2). And the setting value of "3" in (A-3) is "70" times, and the setting value of "A-4" is "4" and "69" times. There is. That is, the setting value “1” is the ST number “28” times + the time reduction gaming state number “72” times = the number of variations “100”, and the setting value “2” is the ST number “29” times + the time reduction The number of times of game state "71" is equal to the number of variations "100", and the setting value "3" is equal to the number of STs "30" plus the number of short time game states "70" = the number of variations "100" The setting value "4" is the ST number "31" times + the time reduction game state number "69" times = the variation number "100" times. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, the number of STs described above (to correspond to the special symbol) is determined for each special symbol. For example, in the special symbol A of (1-1) the set value "1", the ST number "28" is determined, and although illustration is omitted, the time saving gaming state number "72" is also determined ing. Similarly, for example, in the special symbol A of the (4-1) set value "4", the ST number "31" is determined, and although illustration is omitted, the time saving gaming state number "69" Is also defined. In addition, in the special symbol D of (1-2) set value “1”, the number of times of ST “28” is determined, and although illustration is omitted, the number of times of short time game state “72” is also determined ing. Similarly, for example, in the special symbol D of (4-2) set value "4", the ST number "31" is determined, and although illustration is omitted, the number of time saving game states "69" Is also defined. Also, in the set value "1" and in the set value "4", the special symbol A is displayed as "7" as the display mode of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 27a), and the special symbol D is displayed. "7." is displayed as a display mode of the special symbol display (the second special symbol display 27b). Thus, even if the number of times of ST is different for each setting value, for example, if it is the special symbol A, "7" is displayed as the display mode of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 27a), and the special symbol If it is D, "7." is displayed as the display mode of the special symbol display (the second special symbol display 27b), so from the display mode of the special symbol display, the number of STs and the setting value It can be difficult to grasp if there is any. Of course, the special symbol may be made different for each set value. For example, in the setting value “4”, the “special symbol I” corresponding to the “special symbol A” of the setting value “1” may be provided, and the “special symbol A” may be provided. Further, as shown in (5-1), (5-2), (6-1), and (6-2) of FIG. 47, the ST rush rate may not be 100%. In this case, as a post-hit gaming state, the "normal hit" to shift to the time saving gaming state is provided, in the "normal hit", although the number of ST is not granted, "100" is given as the number of time saving gaming status Configure as. And, even when the "100" time-saving game state after the "normal hit" is being executed, the effect shown in FIG. 52 may be executed. In this way, in addition to the pleasure of inferring the number of STs, in addition to the pleasure of estimating whether or not ST is originally granted (it is a mere time-saving gaming state whether it is ST Or not), etc. can be added.

  Here, assuming that the number of times of ST is common to all setting values, for example, since the setting value “1” is more likely to be judged as a hit than the setting value “4”, the ST continuation rate becomes higher. The ST continuation rate will be different. Thus, when the ST continuation rate is different for each set value, it is advantageous for the player to have a higher set value in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, and it can not be expected that a high set value will be set. In the game arcade, there is a possibility that the operation may be reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable to make the ST continuation rate common to all setting values by making the ST number different for each setting value (increasing the ST number the higher the setting value, the lower the setting value). However, if the ST continuation rate is common to all setting values, a new problem is that the setting value set by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of STs different for each setting value. Can occur. That is, in the conventional ST type gaming machine, for example, since the remaining ST number is notified using the liquid crystal display device or the like every 10 changes in ST, the player can thus obtain the ST number. I could easily grasp how many times it was. However, as described above, assuming that the ST continuation rate is common to all set values, the number of STs differs for each set value, so when this is notified during ST as in the prior art, the set value is round. It will be understood. The second embodiment is an invention made for problems that may occur when ST continuity rate is made common to all setting values when such a probability variation gaming state is made ST type. Details will be described below.

  First, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described using FIG. 48 and FIG. FIG. 48 shows the second embodiment ver. 2 of the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 13). FIG. 49 shows the second embodiment ver. It is. Moreover, in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the process different from the process of 1st Embodiment and the process connected to the part are described, and description is abbreviate | omitted about one part process. Hereinafter, only the process different from the process of the first embodiment will be described.

(Step S103-4-14)
At step S103-4-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of times of ST has been set. Here, in step S103-5-26 in FIG. 49 described later, the main CPU 101 is configured to set the ST number according to the set value in the ST number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Referring to the value of the ST number counter provided in the main RAM 103, it is determined whether the ST number is set. Then, if the ST number is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-15. If the ST number is not set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-4.

(Step S103-4-15)
In step S103-4-15, the main CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the ST number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the value of the ST number counter provided in the main RAM 103 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S103-4-16.

(Step S103-4-16)
In step S103-4-16, the main CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the ST number counter provided in the main RAM 103 in step S103-4-15. As a result, the number of STs after subtraction is "0". Determine if Then, if the ST count after subtraction is "0", the process proceeds to step S103-4-17, and if the ST count after subtraction is not "0", the special symbol variation processing is ended and Then, the process proceeds to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-17)
In step S103-4-17, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the processing, “1” is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "1" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S103-4-18.

(Step S103-4-18)
In step S103-4-18, the main CPU 101 sets the above-described command transmission area in order to transmit a gaming state command indicating that the time saving game state is to the effect control board 200. Then, when a gaming state command indicating that it is in the time saving gaming state is set, the process proceeds to step S103-4-19.

(Step S103-4-19)
In step S103-4-19, the main CPU 101 reads the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. Then, when the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is read, the process proceeds to step S103-4-20.

(Step S103-4-20)
In step S103-4-20, the main CPU 101 sets the number of time saving game states according to the setting value read in step S103-4-19. For example, if the set value read in step S103-4-19 is "1", "72" times is set as the time reduction gaming state count in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103, and the set value is "2". If it is ",""71" times is set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103 as the time saving gaming number of times, and if the set value is "3", "70" times as the time saving gaming number of times. If the setting value is "4", "69" times are set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103 as the time reduction gaming state number. Then, when the number of time saving gaming states according to the set value is set, the special symbol variation in progress processing is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interruption processing.

  Next, since step S103-5-23 in FIG. 49 is the same as step S103-5-18 described above, the description is omitted, and step S103-5-24 is the same as step S103-5-19 described above. Therefore, the description is omitted. And if the process of step S103-5-24 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S103-5-25.

(Step S103-5-25)
In step S103-5-25, the main CPU 101 reads the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. Then, when the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is read out, the process proceeds to step S103-5-26.

(Step S103-5-26)
In step S103-5-26, the main CPU 101 sets the ST number according to the setting value read in step S103-5-25. For example, if the set value read in step S103-5-25 is "1", "28" times is set as the ST number in the probability variation number counter provided in the main RAM 103, and the set value is "2". If there is, then “29” is set as the ST number in the probability variation counter provided in the main RAM 103, and if the set value is “3”, “30” is provided as the ST number in the main RAM 103. If the set value is “4”, “31” is set as the ST number in the probability variation counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the ST number according to the set value is set, the hit game processing is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

  By such processing, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the ST number which is different for each set value, and to set the time saving gaming state number which is different for each set value. Next, with regard to the solution method for the problem that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of times of ST different for each setting value described above, FIGS. This will be described using the time chart of and the animation of FIGS.

(Description using the time chart of FIG. 50 and the animation of FIG. 52)
FIG. 50 shows the "high probability state (number of times)", "variational state (number of times)", and "variation in common effect (number of times)" for each setting value, and (a) indicates the end ing. As described in FIG. 46, since the ST rush rate is “100%”, “high probability state (number of times)”, “variation state (number of times),” “ All of the short, middle, and common effects (number of times) are ON. (A) In the case of the setting value "1", as shown in (b), the "high probability state" is turned off when "28" times of the "symbol variation game" is played in the "high probability state" . In addition, as shown in (f), both the "variational state" and the "variation in common short" are turned off when "100" times of the "symbol variation game" are played. (B) In the case of the setting value “2”, as shown in (c), the “high probability state” is turned OFF when “the pattern changing game” is performed “29 times” in the “high probability state” . In addition, as shown in (f), both the "variational state" and the "variation in common short" are turned off when "100" times of the "symbol variation game" are played. (C) In the case of the setting value “3”, as shown in (d), the “high probability state” is turned OFF when “the symbol change game” is performed “30 times” in the “high probability state” . In addition, as shown in (f), both the "variational state" and the "variation in common short" are turned off when "100" times of the "symbol variation game" are played. (D) In the case of the setting value “4”, as shown in (e), the “high probability state” is turned OFF when the “pattern change game” is performed “31 times” in the “high probability state” . In addition, as shown in (f), both the "variational state" and the "variation in common short" are turned off when "100" times of the "symbol variation game" are played.

  FIG. 52 shows the “variational, middle, common effect” in FIG. In FIG. 52, (A-1) to (A-5) show, as an example, notification modes of the image display device 26 from the end of the hit game to the rotation of "100" in the case of the setting value "1". There is. On the other hand, (B-1) to (B-5) show, as an example, notification modes of the image display device 26 from the end of the hit game to the rotation of "100" in the case of the set value "4". In (A-1) and (B-1), the ending screen of the hit game is shown, and in (A-2) and (B-2), the first rotation is shown. The first rotation is a state in which all of the “high probability state”, the “variational state”, and the “variation in common shorting effect” are ON in the time chart of FIG. That is, in the first rotation, the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG as shown by (A-2) and (B-2) are displayed, and the space image is displayed as a background image. Further, in the variable state remaining number notification image 32g for notifying the remaining number of the "variable state", "remaining 99 times" is displayed. Here, an image may be displayed indicating that the user has entered the ST, such as "ST rush!". The (28) rotation is shown in (A-3) and the 31st rotation is shown in (B-3), and both the set value "1" and the set value "4" are still The "high probability state", the "variational state", and the "variational short middle common effect" are in the ON state. In (A-3) and (B-3) as well, as in the first rotation, the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG are displayed, and a space image is displayed as a background image. Further, in the variation state remaining number notification image 32g, "(remaining 72 times)" is displayed in (A-3), and "remaining 69 times" is displayed in (B-3). And in (A-4), the "29" rotation is shown, and in (B-4) the "32" rotation is shown, and both of the set value "1" and the set value "4" are " The high probability state is in the state of being off. That is, between (A-3) and (A-4) and between (B-3) and (B-4) are the boundaries between the high probability state and the low probability state. Here, also in (A-4) and (B-4), the display of the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG continuously displayed from the first rotation and the space image as the background image are displayed. ing. Further, in (A-4), “remaining 71 times” is displayed in (A-4) and “remaining 68 times” is displayed in (B-4) in the variable state remaining number notification image 32 g. In addition, the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG are continuously displayed from the first rotation even in the "100" rotation shown by (A-5) and (B-5), and as a background image, Space image is displayed. Further, "remaining 0 times" is displayed in the variable state remaining number notification image 32g for notifying the remaining number of the "variable state". That is, from the first rotation to the 100th rotation after the end of the winning game, the image displayed on the image display device 26 uses a common image except for the informing image 32g for the number of remaining states, particularly the high probability state Even if it is the boundary between the low probability state and the low probability state, the common image is displayed consistently, so the boundary between the high probability state and the low probability state can not be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26 It has become. In addition, even in the case of the set value "1" and in the case of the set value "4", the notification effect that the high probability state has ended is not performed when the upper limit number of times of the high probability state is reached. The notification effect that the probability state (time saving game state) has been started is not performed either, and the "variational short common action" related to the "variable state" is executed. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, even if the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “4”, the notification frequency of the image display device 26 makes the ST number different for each setting value. To solve the problem that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of STs different for each setting value described above. it can. Further, the image display device 26 does not display the remaining number (ST number) of the “high probability state” but displays the remaining number of the “variation state”. As a result, while the number of times of "variational state" can be grasped, the remaining number of times of "high probability state" (ST number of times) is not notified, so grasping when "high probability state" has ended It is not possible to make it difficult to grasp the set values that have been set.

  In the example of FIG. 52, “the same effect is performed from the first rotation to the 100th rotation in the“ change in common effect in common effect ”, but in the“ change in common effect in common effect ” The contents may be changed. For example, execute "variation short common effect 1" from the first rotation to the 50th rotation, and execute "variation short inside common effect 2" from the 51st rotation to the 70th rotation, from the 71th rotation "Redundant medium common effect 3" may be executed up to the 100th rotation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to a change in the effect.

(Description using time chart of FIG. 51 and animation of FIG. 53)
FIG. 51 is another example of FIG. 50. The number of times of high probability state is the same as that of FIG. 50, but all the setting values are common, and the number of times of variable state is “28” times (ST After the end, the time saving game state can not be obtained), and the effect of concealment effect is performed from the “28” rotation of (b) to the 31 rotation of (c). That is, from the end of the hit in (a), the high probability state and the variable state become ON, and the concealment effect remains OFF. Then, when the “symbol variation game” at the 28th rotation in (b) is ended, the variation state is turned off and the concealment effect is turned on in common with all the set values. The high probability state is turned off in the same number of times as in FIG. In addition, when the “symbol variation game” at the 31st rotation of (c) is completed, the concealment effect is turned off at all the setting values in common.

  FIG. 53 shows the “hidden effect” in FIG. In (A-1) to (A-4) in FIG. 53, as an example, a notification mode of the image display device 26 from the “28” rotation to the “31” rotation in the case of the setting value “1” ) Is shown. On the other hand, (B-1) to (B-4), as an example, the notification mode (consecutive effect) of the image display device 26 from the rotation of 28 to the rotation of 31 for the setting value of 4 It shows. In (A-1) and (B-1), the "28" rotation is shown, and in this "28" rotation, both (A-1) and (B-1) have high probability states . However, in the image display device 26, a background image of "OO mode" is displayed, and further, non-deterministic notification such as "Is it highly accurate?" In addition, although the display mode of the “1” rotation to the “27” rotation is omitted, an image for definitely notifying that it is in the high probability state is displayed, and from such a notification mode By switching to the concealment effect, the player can not grasp whether the high probability state is continuing or whether the high probability state is ended and is in the normal gaming state. And in (A-2) and (B-2), the "29" rotation is shown, and in this "29" rotation, the setting value "4" continues to be in the high probability state, but is set The value "1" has transitioned to the low probability state. However, in the image display device 26, the background image of "OO mode" is continuously displayed, and further, nondeterministic notification such as "Is it highly accurate?" That is, when the setting value is “1”, the low probability state is internally obtained from the “29” rotation, but notification that the image display device 26 has shifted to the low probability state, for example, the low probability state The corresponding background image is not displayed, and the concealment effect is performed at least until the 31st rotation, which is the upper limit number of times of the high probability state of the setting value “4”. Hereinafter, the set value "4" is high similarly for the "30th" rotation indicated by (A-3) and (B-3) and the "31" rotation indicated by (A-4) and (B-4). Although the probability state is continuing, the setting value “1” has shifted to the low probability state, and the image display device 26 continuously displays the background image “○ mode”, and further “ Are non-deterministic announcements such as "Is it highly accurate?" That is, even in the boundary between the high probability state and the low probability state, since the same concealment effect is consistently performed between the “28” rotation and the “31” rotation, the high probability state and the low probability state The boundary of the image can not be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, even if the setting value is “1” or the setting value is “4”, it can not be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26, It is possible to solve the problem that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the ST number different for each setting value described above.

  In addition, in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, it can also be comprised as follows. That is, in FIG. 52, as shown in FIG. 54, if the “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition” occurs between “100” rotation after the end of the hit game, lottery is performed, and if it wins, After the end of the "100" rotation of the time saving game state, the ending screen as shown by (A-4) and (B-4) is displayed, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the ending screen. Good. In addition, you may apply the conditions in the fluctuation in 1st Embodiment to "a setting suggestion production execution lottery condition" said here. That is, in the non-passing cases shown by (A-1) to (A-4), only the character image ChaG is displayed as shown by (A-4) of the ending, but (B-1) to In the case shown in B-4), as indicated by (B-4) in the ending, the character image ChaF is displayed in addition to the character image ChaG, and as an example, the set value “1” or the setting It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 55, if “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition” occurs between “27” rotation after the end of the hit game, lottery is performed, and if it is won, After the concealment effect is finished, an ending screen as shown by (A-5) and (B-5) may be displayed, and a setting suggestion effect may be executed on the ending screen. In addition, you may apply the conditions in the fluctuation in 1st Embodiment to "a setting suggestion production execution lottery condition" said here. That is, in the non-passing cases shown by (A-1) to (A-5), only the character image ChaG is displayed as shown by (A-5) of the ending, but (B-1) to (B-5) In the case shown in B-5), as shown in (B-5) of the ending, the character image ChaF is displayed in addition to the character image ChaG, and as an example, the set value “1” or the setting It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the value is “3”.

  As in the second embodiment, when the probability variation gaming state is the ST type, it is more effective to use the following “setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition” as follows. That is, in the "special symbol winning determination process", although it was determined to be a hit and entered into the ST after the end of the hit game, in the case where the hit ran through without hitting even once in the ST, "setting suggestion effect execution lottery conditions" "May be established. In this case, it is possible to relieve the discouragement of the player in the case where the ST ends without hitting even though the player has entered the ST with great effort.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, for example, in the setting value “1”, the winning probability in the “normal gaming state” and the “time saving gaming state” is “1/280”, and the hitting probability in the “probable variation gaming state” As "1/28", for example, in the setting value "4", the winning probability in "normal gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" is "1/310", and the winning probability in "probability changing gaming state" is " It is 1/31. In addition, assuming that such a hit probability, the continuation rate of ST is higher for the set value “1” than for the set value “4”, so the set value should be common in all set values for the ST continuation rate. The ST number of “1” is “28”, and the ST number of “4” is “31” (FIG. 46). Also, if such ST number is used, the set value is grasped by the player from the difference in ST number, so that the set value is not grasped from the difference in ST number, for example, in the set value “1” In the setting value "4", the ST count "31" + time reduction game state is performed by setting the ST number "28" times + time reduction game number of times "72" times (the total number of "change states" is "100" times). The number of times was 69 times (the number of times of "variation state" was "100" in total). In addition, in the total of "100" times of "variational state", the variation common short middle common effect is executed, and in particular, it is not notified that ST has ended or that the time saving gaming state has started (Fig. 52). In this way, it is possible for the player to give the appearance that a total of "100" times of "variational state" have been given, and in particular, when the ST has ended or when the short time gaming state is Since it can be difficult to grasp whether it has started, even if the continuation rate of ST is made common to all setting values, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine can be grasped from the upper limit number of times of different ST, It is possible to solve such problems.

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment, only differences from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and the description of the common parts will be omitted. Therefore, it is needless to say that, for example, the setting suggestion effect described in the first embodiment may also be applied in the third embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, although the setting indication effect is installed, the setting value is grasped from the appearance of the symbol at the time of turning on the power, etc., and the execution of the setting indication effect is wasted Invention to prevent that.

  First, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described using FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 shows the third embodiment of the main control board main process (see FIG. 8) ver. FIG. 57 shows the process when receiving the set value information command (described in the third embodiment only) performed in the main command reception process in the effect control board timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Further, in FIG. 56, a process different from the process of the first embodiment and a process connected to the part are described, and a part of the process is omitted. Hereinafter, only the process different from the process of the first embodiment will be described.

(Step S16)
At step S16, the main CPU 101 determines the initial appearance of the special symbol display. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 101 does not perform the setting value change processing in the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. Regardless of the case, determine the symbol (also called initial appearance) to be displayed first. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, a symbol (also referred to as an initial appearance) to first display "-" (horizontal bar symbol) Decide as. When the initial appearance number in the special symbol display is determined, the process proceeds to step S17. In addition, "-" (horizontal bar symbol), when it is determined to be lost in the "special symbol hitting determination processing", the loser displayed on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. It is the same as the design. Therefore, it is a lost symbol to be displayed in a final symbol on the special symbol indicator = the special symbol indicator.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the determined initial appearance in the output port to display the determined initial appearance on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. . In the special symbol display control process of step S107 in FIG. 9, data corresponding to the initial appearance set in the output port is used to determine the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. The initial appearance will be displayed. Then, when data corresponding to the determined initial appearance is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Process when setting value information command is received)
FIG. 57 shows the process of receiving a set value information command performed by the sub CPU 201. This process is performed when it is determined in step S301 in FIG. 16 that the set value information command has been received.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting value in the sub RAM 203. Note that the process performed here is the same as the contents described in the case where the above-described “set value information command of FIG. 8” is received. Then, when the set value is stored in the sub RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S301-2.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial appearance of the decorative symbol images (the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c) displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the sub-CPU 201 is powered on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values are changed in the decoration symbol images (left decoration symbol image 26a, middle decoration symbol image 26b, right decoration symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26. When the processing is performed, the symbol (also referred to as the initial appearance) to be displayed first is determined regardless of the case where the processing is not performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 58B, in the image display device 26, "1" is used as the left decorative symbol image 26a, "2" as the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and "3" as the right decorative symbol image 26c. Determined as the symbol to be displayed first (also referred to as the initial appearance). Then, when the initial appearance of the decorative symbol images (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-3. The combination “123” of each decorative symbol image is the same as a part of the lost symbol which is displayed on the image display device 26 when it is determined that the “special symbol winning determination process” is lost. Therefore, the initial appearance (combination) of each decorative symbol image = a part of the lost symbol (combination) to be determined and displayed on the image display device 26.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 201 performs the setting value change process in the fourth symbol image 26 d of the image display device 26 regardless of whether it is performed or not. Determine the symbol (also called initial appearance) to be displayed on. For example, as shown in FIG. 58C, in the image display device 26, the fourth symbol image 26d consisting of "123" is determined as a symbol (also referred to as an initial appearance) to be displayed first. When the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-4. In addition, "123" of the fourth symbol image 26d is also a part of the lost symbol (combination) displayed in the image display device 26 similarly to the initial appearance (combination) of each decorative symbol image described above .

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial appearance of the hold count images (first start opening hold count image 26e, second start opening hold count image 26f) to be displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the sub-CPU 201 is powered on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value is changed in the hold count images of the image display device 26 (first start opening hold count image 26e, second start opening hold count image 26f). When the process is performed, regardless of the case where it is not performed, the number of reserved images (also referred to as an initial appearance) to be displayed first is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), in the image display device 26, “0” is first displayed as the first starting opening holding number image 26e and “0” is displayed as the second starting opening holding number image 26f. Determined as a number image (also referred to as an initial appearance). Then, when the initial appearance number of the hold number images (the first start opening hold number image 26e and the second start opening hold number image 26f) to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-5.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub CPU 201 sets data corresponding to the determined initial appearance in the output port in order to display the determined initial appearance on the image display device 26. In the output control process for each effect device in step S304 in FIG. 16, the determined initial appearance is displayed on the image display device 26 using data corresponding to the initial appearance set in the output port. Become. For example, in the decorative symbol images (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c), the initial appearance shown in FIG. 58 (B) is displayed, and in the fourth symbol image 26d, The initial appearance shown in 58 (C) is displayed, and the initial appearance shown in FIG. 58 (D) is displayed in the holding number image (the first starting opening holding number image 26 e, the second starting opening holding number image 26 f) Be done. Then, when data corresponding to the determined initial appearance is set in the output port, the process proceeds to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub CPU 201 determines a light emission pattern. Here, the sub CPU 201 is configured to determine a light emission pattern in the light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29. The light emitting pattern is emitted by the light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29 from the time of power on. For example, "light emission pattern 1" composed of "3S", "light emission pattern 2" composed of "4S", and "light emission pattern 3" composed of "5S" If there is a plurality of light emission patterns as in the case where a set value is changed in the process, one of the light emission patterns is determined regardless of the case where it is not performed. The light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29 are configured to emit light according to the determined light emission pattern. The pachinko gaming machine 1 for which the setting value has not been changed emits, for example, "3S" after the power is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 for which the setting value has been changed is, for example, Two pachinko gaming machines 1 for which the setting value has not been changed to emit light after "4S", and one pachinko gaming machine 1 for which the setting values have been changed, a total of three machines are arranged side by side. If it is installed on an island, only one light emission pattern is different, and there is a problem that it becomes easy to be grasped that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed in setting value. With respect to such problems, when the setting value is changed in the process, regardless of the case where it is not performed, any light emission pattern is determined, and the light emission device is determined by the determined light emission pattern. 9 and the board illumination device 29 are configured to emit light, so that the time from when the power is turned on to when the light emitting device 9 and the board illumination device 29 start emitting light becomes random for each pachinko gaming machine 1, It can be made difficult to specify the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting value has been changed from the difference in light emission pattern. Then, when the light emission pattern is determined, the setting value information command reception process ends.

  Such processing makes it possible to display the initial appearance of the image display device 26 in the third embodiment. Next, the display of the initial number of eyes mentioned in the description of the above-described flowchart will be described using the animations of FIGS. 58 and 59. Note that FIG. 58 is a specification that displays the initial appearance dedicated to the power on regardless of the last appearance on the previous day, and FIG. 59 stores the final appearance on the previous day, and the initial appearance at the power on It is a specification to be displayed as an appearance.

  FIG. 58 (A) shows the display mode of the initial appearance of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, in which (A-1) shows the case where the setting value is changed. , (A-2) shows the case where the setting value has not been changed. As described above, in each of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed as the initial appearance, and further, (A-1) In any case of (A-2), "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed. As described above, even when the setting value is changed or the setting value is not changed, the initial appearances of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are common. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the change in the setting value from the display manner of the initial appearance. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  FIG. 58 (B) shows a display mode of initial appearances of the decorative symbol images (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26, and (B-1) (B-2) shows the case where the setting value has not been changed. As described above, in the initial appearance, the left decorative symbol image 26 a is “1”, the middle decorative symbol image 26 b is “2”, the right decorative symbol image 26 c is “3”, and (B -1) or (B-2), the left decorative symbol image 26a is "1", the middle decorative symbol image 26b is "2", and the right decorative symbol image 26c is "3". It is displayed. As described above, even if the setting values are changed or not, the decorative symbol images (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) are displayed. Since the initial appearance is common, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the change in the setting value from the display mode of the initial appearance. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  FIG. 58C shows a display mode of the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26, where (C-1) is a case where the setting value is changed, (C-2). Shows the case where the setting value has not been changed. As described above, “123” is displayed as the initial appearance, and “123” is displayed in any of the cases (C-1) and (C-2). As described above, even when the setting value is changed, even if the setting value is not changed, the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26 d is common, and thus the display manner of the initial appearance is provided. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp whether or not the setting value has been changed. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  FIG. 58D shows a display mode of initial appearances of the hold count images (the first start opening hold count image 26e and the second start opening hold count image 26f) of the image display device 26, and FIG. (D-2) shows the case where the setting value has not been changed. As described above, in the initial appearance, “0” is displayed for each of the first starting opening reserved number image 26e and the second starting opening reserved number image 26f, and further, (D-1), (D In either case of-2), "0" is displayed. As described above, even when the setting value is changed, even if the setting value is not changed, the initial appearances of the first start opening hold number image 26e and the second start opening hold number image 26f are common. Since it becomes, it can be made difficult to grasp the change existence of a setting value from the display mode of this initial appearance eye. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  Next, a modified example will be described using FIG. First, FIG. 59 (A) shows the display mode of the special symbol display, and (A-1) shows the last appearance of the previous day, that is, the game store closes its store, and the power is turned off. It represents the outcome of the occasion. That is, when the store is closed, since the player is not playing a game and the lost symbol is displayed, the final appearance of the previous day is "-" (horizontal bar symbol). And (A-2) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is changed, and (A-3) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is not changed. In any of (A-2) and (A-3), the same "-" (horizontal bar symbol) as the final appearance on the previous day is displayed as the initial appearance. As described above, even when the setting value is changed, even if the setting value is not changed, the initial appearances of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are common. And since it is common to the last appearance of the previous day, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the change in the setting value from the display mode of the initial appearance and the difference with the last appearance of the previous day. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  Next, FIG. 59 (B) shows a display mode of the decorative symbol images (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26, (B-1) Represents the final appearance on the previous day, that is, the appearance when the gaming machine is closing its store and the power is turned off. That is, when the store is closed, the player is not playing a game, and since the lost symbol is displayed, the final appearance of the previous day is, for example, “5” for the left decorative symbol image 26a, and the middle decorative symbol image 26b. Is “2”, and the right decorative symbol image 26 c is “6”. And (B-2) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is changed, and (B-3) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is not changed. In any of (B-2) and (B-3), the same as the final appearance of the previous day, for example, the left decorative symbol image 26a is "5", the middle decorative symbol image 26b is "2", the right decorative symbol The image 26 c displays “6” as the initial appearance. Thus, even when the setting values are changed, even if the setting values are not changed, the decoration symbol image of the image display device 26 (left decoration symbol image 26a, middle decoration symbol image 26b, right decoration) Since the initial appearance of the symbol image 26c) is common, and the final appearance of the previous day is also common, the difference between the display appearance of the initial appearance and the final appearance of the previous day causes the setting value to be changed Can be difficult to grasp. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  Next, FIG. 59 (C) shows the display mode of the fourth symbol image 26 d of the image display device 26, and (C- 1) shows the final appearance of the previous day, that is, the game store has closed its store. Show the numbers when turning off the power. That is, when the store is closed, since the player is not playing a game and the lost symbol is displayed, the final appearance of the previous day is, for example, "526". And (C-2) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is changed, and (C-3) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is not changed. In any of (C-2) and (C-3), for example, "526", which is the same as the final appearance on the previous day, is displayed as the initial appearance. As described above, even when the setting value is changed, even if the setting value is not changed, the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26 d of the image display device 26 is common, and the previous day Since it is common to the final appearance of the, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the change in the setting value from the display mode of the initial appearance and the difference from the final appearance of the previous day. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  Next, FIG. 59 (D) shows the display mode of the hold count images (the first start opening hold count image 26e and the second start opening hold count image 26f) of the image display device 26, (D-1) Represents the final appearance on the previous day, that is, the appearance when the gaming machine is closing its store and the power is turned off. In other words, when the store is closed, the player is not playing a game, and the number of held items is “0”, so the final appearance of the previous day is “0”. And (D-2) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is changed, and (D-3) shows the initial appearance when the setting value is not changed. In any of (D-2) and (D-3), "0", which is the same as the final appearance on the previous day, is displayed as the initial appearance. As described above, even when the setting value is changed, even when the setting value is not changed, the number-of-hold images of the image display device 26 (the first starting opening holding number image 26e, the second starting opening holding Since the initial appearance of the number image 26f) is common, and also the final appearance of the previous day, the setting value is changed or not from the difference between the display appearance of the initial appearance and the final appearance of the previous day Can be difficult to grasp. This can prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine is powered on, the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b) is accompanied by a change in the setting value. The initial appearance "horizontal bar design" is displayed, and the initial appearance "123" is displayed in the decorative design images of the image display device 26 (left decorative design image 26a, middle decorative design image 26b, right decorative design image 26c). The fourth symbol image 26 d of the image display device 26 displays the initial appearance number “123”, and the hold number image of the image display device 26 (first start opening hold number image 26 e, second start opening hold number image 26 f ), The initial appearance "0" was displayed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine is powered on, even when the setting value does not change, the same initial appearance as in the case where the setting value changes as described above is set (FIG. 58). As a result, the same predetermined identification information is displayed as an initial display mode when the power is turned on even when the setting value is changed (setting) or not. Therefore, it is difficult to detect whether or not the setting value has been changed.

(Other conceivable technical ideas)
Hereinafter, other technical ideas according to the above-described embodiment will be described. In the above-described embodiment, although the adjustment of the light amount and the adjustment of the volume using the arrow key button 16 are described, the adjustment of the light amount using the arrow key button 16 is performed when the setting suggestion effect is performed. Or, the adjustment of the volume may be limited (not adjustable). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from noticing that the setting suggestion effect is being performed by the level gauge image indicating the adjustment degree of the light amount or the volume, or the adjustment sound. In addition, when setting suggestion effects are being performed, although it is possible to adjust the light amount and the volume using the cross key button 16, a level gauge image indicating the adjustment degree of the volume and an adjustment sound are output. Even if the level gauge image is displayed small and the volume of the adjustment sound is reduced and output, it is prevented that the user is not aware that the setting suggestion effect is being performed. Good. Further, for example, the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of normal gaming state modes that can be selected by the player operating the effect button 14, and the setting suggestion effect is executed in the gaming machine capable of switching the mode during or during fluctuation stop. When the camera is switched on, mode switching may be limited (cannot be adjusted). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect from being ended by the switching of the mode despite the setting suggestion effect being executed.

  Although various error commands have been described in the above embodiment, when the above-described various error commands are received while performing the setting suggestion effect, notification corresponding to the received error command may be performed. For example, when an error command indicating radio wave abnormality is received, an image indicating radio wave abnormality is superimposed on the character image or displayed separately from the character image even while the character image performing setting suggestion effect is being displayed. Good. This allows the administrator to quickly detect that an error has occurred. Also, with regard to the above-mentioned minor error command, notification may be performed corresponding to the received error command. For example, even though the game ball is paid out in the winning game, if the game ball is not removed from the lower receiving tray 5b, an error command for performing a notification urging removal of the game ball from the lower receiving tray 5b is received In this case, even while displaying a character image for performing setting suggestion effects, a message image “Please pull a ball” may be superimposed on the character image or displayed separately from the character image. On the other hand, when performing the setting suggestion effect, if the above-described various error commands are received, notification corresponding to the received error command may not be performed, and it is performed after the setting suggestion effect is finished. The above-described minor error command may not be notified in response to the received error command.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although it indicated about making it impossible to overlook the change existence of a setting value by the display mode of the symbol at the time of power activation, the change of the setting value is also carried out about the setting concerning the output of various effects. The same idea can be applied when there is a change and when there is no change in the setting value. “Setting relating to the output of various effects” refers to the adjustment of light intensity and the adjustment of volume using the cross key button 16. For example, when the game store is closed, the cross key button 16 of the player is used. When the light intensity is set to "strong" by the operation and the volume is set to the maximum volume, the next day's store opening (when the power is ON) does not involve the change of the setting value even when the setting value changes. Even in this case, the light amount and the sound volume may be in accordance with the values set by the gaming machine side adjustment switch (not shown, but a switch which can be operated only by a gaming staff) provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the value set by the game machine adjustment switch (not shown) is “1”, “medium” may be used as the light quantity and an intermediate volume may be used as the volume. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change in the setting value from being overlooked from the “setting relating to the output of various effects”.

  In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the character image displayed on the image display device 26. However, the setting suggestion effect is performed on the stage image (background image) displayed on the image display device 26. May be For example, when performing stage change between standard "mountain stage", "sea stage", and "river stage", only the high setting value (setting value "1" or setting value "2") is used. Stage (e.g. "Space stage") may be provided. As a result, the high setting value (the setting value “1” or the setting value “2”) is determined by shifting to the “space stage”, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the stage change. Further, the setting values may be suggested in the order of stage change without providing another stage. For example, the transition from "mountain stage" to "sea stage", transition from "sea stage" to "river stage", and transition from "river stage" to "mountain stage" are high setting as the standard transition order. Only in the case of the value (set value "1" or set value "2"), shift from "mountain stage" to "river stage", shift from "river stage" to "sea stage", "sea stage" It may move to "the mountain stage" (so-called law breaking). As a result, since the high set value (set value “1” or set value “2”) is determined from the breaking of the stage change law, the player's attention can be drawn to the stage change.

  In addition, a special stage that transitions only after the end of the hit game, after the end of the time saving game state, or after the end of the probability game state is provided, and the setting value is suggested by the number of stays (the number of fluctuations) of this special stage. You may do so. For example, when staying on the special stage for 40 revolutions after the end of the hit game, it indicates that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", and stays on the special stage for 50 revolutions after the end of the hit game In the case where it is, it suggests that the setting value is “1” or the setting value “3”, and when staying on the special stage for 60 rotations after the end of the winning game, the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” May be suggested. In this way, after the end of the hit game, after the end of the short game state, or after the end of the probability change game state, it is possible to pay attention to how long the special stage continues, so after the end of the hit game etc. It is possible to prevent an immediate resignation and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Details of the means etc. which are described in the gaming machine of the above (1) will be described.
The game is started based on the starting opening (the first starting opening 21 and the second starting opening 22) formed in the gaming area (playing area 7) where the gaming ball can flow down and the fact that the gaming ball has entered the starting opening. Means for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state (per game) which is advantageous to the player (main CPU 101 performing a special symbol hitting determination process), and a gaming state that can be shifted after the end of the special gaming state , Advantageous gaming state control means (main CPU 101 for controlling the probability changing gaming state, time saving gaming state) to control the advantageous gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time saving gaming state) advantageous for the player, and the degree of advantage (special symbol) Setting operator for setting any of the setting values from multiple setting values (setting value “1” to setting value “4”) with different probability of being judged to be hitting in the collision judgment process (Setting change device 31), suggestion effect execution means (sub CPU 201) for executing indication effect (for example, setting indication effect displayed on the image display device 26) indicating setting values set by the setting operation means , And the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in the advantageous game state.

Next, details of the means etc. described in the gaming machine of (2) will be described.
In the gaming machine according to the above (1), identification information (a special symbol of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, the image display device 26 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening) The identification information display which starts the fluctuation display of the decoration design picture and the 4th design picture 26d), stops the fluctuation display with the passage of fluctuation time (the time which is decided to fluctuation pattern) and derives the result of the aforementioned decision Means (a first special symbol display 27a, a second special symbol display 27b, an image display device 26) and a first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern 13 ~) in which a first fluctuation time is defined as the fluctuation time Fluctuation pattern 17), a second fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern 12) in which a second fluctuation time whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time is prescribed (for example, fluctuation pattern 12), the first fluctuation pattern, and the second Fluctuation And a variation pattern determination unit (main CPU 101 that performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing) that determines one of the variation patterns from the plurality of variation patterns including a turn; When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the suggestion effect is not performed.

Next, details of the means etc. described in the gaming machine of (3) will be described.
In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the indication effect is an effect that only indicates the setting value set by the setting operation means (for example, only an indication of the setting value as in the overhead image ChaA) It is characterized in that it is an effect to appear for

Next, details of the means etc. described in the gaming machine of (4) will be described.
In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the suggestion effect is an effect (for example, the suggestion of suggesting the possibility that the special game state will be performed, in addition to the suggestion of the setting value set by the setting operation means) And, as in the case of a movable body notice and a symbol action notice, it is an effect that suggests a set value and also suggests a degree of expectation to a hit game.

  In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the contents described in the present embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine). The invention can also be applied to an arrange ball game machine.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Medium frame 3a Frame opening detection SW
4 glass frame 5 saucer member 5a upper saucer 5b lower saucer 6 game board 7 game area 8 launch handle 9 light emitting device 10 speaker 11 ball releasing button 12 ball lending button 12a balance display part 12b ball lending available lamp 13 card return button 14 presentation button 14a Effect button detection SW
15 production lever 15a production lever detection SW
16 Four-way controller 16a Four-way controller detection SW
17 Stage 18 Outer Rail Member 19 Inner Rail Member 20 Gate Member 20a Gate Detection SW
21 1st starting opening 21a 1st starting opening detection SW
22 2nd starting opening 22a 2nd starting opening detection SW
22b 2nd starting opening opening and closing solenoid 23 normal winning a prize opening 23a normal winning a prize opening detection SW
24 big winning opening 24a big winning opening detection SW
24b big winning opening and closing solenoid 25 out port 25a out port detection SW
26 image display device 26a left decoration symbol image 26b middle decoration symbol image 26c right decoration symbol image 26d fourth symbol image 26e first starting opening holding number image 26f second starting opening holding number image 27 symbol display device 27a first special symbol display 27b 2nd special symbol display 28 movable body 29 illumination device 30 panel drive device 31 setting change device 31a setting change key hole 31b setting change button 31c setting confirmation button 31d setting display unit 100 main control board 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
200 effect control board 201 sub CPU
202 sub ROM
203 sub RAM
204 RTC Device 300 Payout Control Board 301 Payout CPU
302 Payout ROM
303 Payout RAM
304 Dispensing device 305 Launching device 400 Power board

Claims (4)

A starting opening formed in a game area where game balls can flow down,
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the starting opening;
Advantageous gaming state control means for controlling an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, which is a gaming state that can be shifted after the end of the special gaming state;
Setting operation means for setting any one of setting values from plural setting values having different degrees of advantage in the determination;
Indication effect execution means for executing an indication effect suggesting the set value set by the setting operation means;
Equipped with
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in the advantageous game state,
A game machine characterized by Identification information display means for starting variable display of identification information based on the game ball entering the starting opening, and stopping the variable display with the elapse of the fluctuation time to derive the result of the determination;
A first fluctuation pattern in which a first fluctuation time is defined as the fluctuation time;
A second fluctuation pattern in which a second fluctuation time whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time is defined;
Variation pattern determination means for determining any variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern;
And further
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the suggestion effect execution means does not execute the suggestion effect when the second variation pattern is determined.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the suggested effect is an effect of only suggesting a setting value set by the setting operation means.   The indication effect is an effect that indicates the possibility that the special game state will be performed, in addition to the indication of the setting value set by the setting operation means. The gaming machine described in.